1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
166 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
177 by the \SpecialChar LyX
182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
184 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
185 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
186 Documentation mailing list:
187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
189 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
211 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
215 \begin_inset Note Note
218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
219 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
220 \begin_inset Newline newline
225 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
233 \begin_layout Standard
234 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
235 LatexCommand tableofcontents
242 \begin_layout Chapter
246 \begin_layout Section
247 What is \SpecialChar LyX
251 \begin_layout Standard
253 is a document preparation system.
254 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
255 scripts, publishable books, business
256 letters and proposals,
257 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
261 It is unlike most other
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
271 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
287 pt type, left justified, 5
288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
297 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
301 \begin_layout Standard
302 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
307 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
311 \begin_layout Standard
316 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
317 's philosophy: most importantly,
318 the format of all of the manuals.
319 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
320 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
321 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
324 \begin_layout Section
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
331 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
333 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
334 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
340 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
341 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
343 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
344 only a vertical scrollbar.
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
349 The first case is large images.
350 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
351 the image and use the option
362 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
365 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
370 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
378 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
385 \begin_layout Section
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
392 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
394 Just select the manual you want to read from the
401 \begin_layout Section
402 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
406 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
413 \begin_layout Standard
414 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
415 can be configured via the menu
417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
421 \begin_inset Index idx
424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 packages are available.
435 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
437 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
438 was installed on your system,
439 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
444 \begin_inset space \space{}
447 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
448 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
450 To force \SpecialChar LyX
451 to re-inspect your system use
453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
457 \begin_inset Index idx
460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
467 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
468 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
471 \begin_layout Section
474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
476 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
485 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 installed but you will not be
488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
489 or print your documents
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
494 Some \SpecialChar LyX
495 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
504 which can produce PDFs and the like.
507 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
512 every \SpecialChar LyX
513 document can still be output as plain text
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
520 \begin_layout Standard
521 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
527 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
528 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
531 \begin_layout Standard
532 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
534 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
537 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
545 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
546 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
553 \begin_inset Index idx
556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
572 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 \begin_layout Chapter
577 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
581 \begin_layout Section
582 Basic File Operations
583 \begin_inset Index idx
586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
595 \begin_layout Standard
600 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
601 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
642 arg "buffer-new-template"
648 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \begin_layout Itemize
678 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
682 \begin_layout Itemize
684 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
696 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
722 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
756 arg "buffer-write-as"
760 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
764 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
782 \begin_layout Itemize
796 \begin_layout Itemize
810 \begin_layout Standard
811 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
812 few minor differences.
815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
826 command lists the available templates.
827 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
828 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
829 and possibly propose text fragments
831 for the document, features
832 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
835 you would otherwise need to
836 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
838 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
846 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
854 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
860 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
861 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
907 to open a file or create a new one, that big
908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
912 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
916 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
927 \begin_layout Standard
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
951 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
954 people work on the same document at the same time.
958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
967 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
968 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
972 \begin_inset Flex Emph
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
977 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
978 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1000 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1020 will reload the document from disk.
1021 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1022 and want to restore it to the last save
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1036 them as your changes.
1039 \begin_layout Section
1040 Basic Editing Features
1041 \begin_inset Index idx
1044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1053 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1060 \begin_layout Standard
1061 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1062 can perform cut and paste operations
1063 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1064 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1065 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1066 editing features and how to access
1068 We will start with cut and paste.
1071 \begin_layout Standard
1072 As you might expect, the
1076 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1077 various other editing features.
1078 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1082 \begin_layout Itemize
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1120 \begin_layout Itemize
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1158 \begin_layout Itemize
1164 \begin_inset Index idx
1167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1192 \begin_layout Itemize
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1202 \begin_layout Itemize
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1212 \begin_layout Itemize
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset Index idx
1229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1256 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1266 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1272 \begin_layout Standard
1273 The first three are self-explanatory.
1274 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1275 and other programs using
1296 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1297 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1302 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1303 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1304 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1305 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1306 into individual cells.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1316 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1320 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1331 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1346 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1347 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1348 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1354 \begin_inset space \space{}
1357 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1358 text which is often meaningless.)
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1368 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1387 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1388 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1389 is inserted as one paragraph.
1390 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1400 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1409 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1423 \begin_inset space ~
1426 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1429 paste from the primary selection.
1430 This is normally the currently selected text.
1433 \begin_layout Standard
1436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1442 \begin_inset space ~
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1460 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1462 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1466 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1469 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1474 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1477 \begin_inset space ~
1488 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1490 \begin_inset space ~
1494 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1496 \begin_inset space ~
1504 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1518 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1522 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1526 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1530 \begin_inset space ~
1542 arg "word-find-backward"
1545 shortcut) to search backwards
1549 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1550 Even if you close the widget,
1559 arg "word-find-backward"
1562 will search further.
1567 \begin_layout Standard
1569 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1574 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1577 \begin_inset space ~
1582 field and searches the next match.
1588 \begin_inset space ~
1593 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1595 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1597 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1601 \begin_layout Standard
1603 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1604 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1607 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1616 \begin_inset space ~
1622 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1625 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1626 If the toggle is set, searching for
1627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1638 will not match the word
1639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1652 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1656 \begin_layout Itemize
1659 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1663 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1667 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1672 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1673 to only find complete words, e.
1674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1678 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1707 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1711 \begin_layout Itemize
1714 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1719 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1722 \begin_layout Itemize
1725 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1730 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1734 \begin_inset space ~
1742 \begin_layout Itemize
1744 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1749 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1750 been reached without asking.
1751 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1752 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1753 so you need to put it back manually.
1756 \begin_layout Standard
1757 \paragraph_spacing single
1759 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1760 The widget also has a
1764 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1765 widget), hiding replace and options.
1770 button brings you back to the full size.
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 \paragraph_spacing single
1777 also offers an advanced
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1789 feature that is described in section
1790 \begin_inset space ~
1794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1796 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1804 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1805 \begin_inset space \space{}
1809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1817 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1819 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1824 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1835 arg "inset-select-all"
1838 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1839 When the cursor is inside an inset
1842 arg "inset-select-all"
1845 selects the content of the inset.
1849 arg "inset-select-all"
1852 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1853 then to the whole document.
1857 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1860 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1864 \begin_layout Section
1866 \begin_inset Index idx
1869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1876 \begin_inset Index idx
1879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1888 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1895 \begin_layout Standard
1896 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1898 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1901 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1904 or the toolbar button
1911 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1916 or the toolbar button
1923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1930 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1934 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1937 \begin_layout Standard
1939 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1940 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1949 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1950 This is a consequence of the 100
1951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1954 step undo limit mentioned above.
1957 \begin_layout Standard
1966 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1968 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1972 \begin_layout Section
1974 \begin_inset Index idx
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1986 \begin_layout Standard
1987 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1990 \begin_layout Enumerate
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 once anywhere in the edit window.
2001 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2005 \begin_layout Enumerate
2010 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2020 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2023 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2024 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2026 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2027 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2033 \begin_layout Itemize
2034 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2037 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2044 \begin_layout Enumerate
2045 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2049 \begin_layout Standard
2050 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2051 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2055 \begin_layout Section
2057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2059 name "sec:Navigating"
2064 \begin_inset Index idx
2067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 \begin_layout Standard
2078 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2081 \begin_layout Itemize
2086 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2087 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2090 \begin_layout Itemize
2091 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2093 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2095 \begin_inset space ~
2100 or by the toolbar button
2103 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2109 \begin_layout Itemize
2110 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2112 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2115 and use the same menu to return to them.
2116 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2119 \begin_layout Standard
2123 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2128 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2129 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2131 \begin_inset space ~
2136 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2137 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2138 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2139 last editing position.
2142 \begin_layout Standard
2147 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2151 \begin_layout Subsection
2153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2155 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 Navigating ! Outline
2170 \begin_inset Index idx
2173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2182 \begin_layout Standard
2183 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2184 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2185 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2186 \begin_inset space ~
2190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2192 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2196 ), notes, or citations (see section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2203 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2208 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2214 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2215 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2216 dialog and to modify the citation.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2224 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2225 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2227 Labels and References
2229 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2238 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2242 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2243 control the display.
2248 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2249 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2254 option keeps it in the current view state.
2255 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2256 \begin_inset space ~
2259 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2260 \begin_inset space ~
2263 3, the subsections of sections
2264 \begin_inset space ~
2267 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2272 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2273 \begin_inset space ~
2277 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2287 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2290 \begin_layout Standard
2297 button refreshes the TOC (
2298 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2300 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2304 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2306 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2310 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2314 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2318 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2322 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2324 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2328 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2330 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2334 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2336 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2340 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2344 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2346 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2350 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2354 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2358 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2362 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2366 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2370 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2374 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2378 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2380 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2384 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2398 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2399 For example, you can move section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset space ~
2407 2.4 or after section
2408 \begin_inset space ~
2413 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2426 (or the corresponding key bindings
2434 ) you can change the level of sections.
2435 You can make section
2436 \begin_inset space ~
2440 \begin_inset space ~
2444 \begin_inset space ~
2450 \begin_layout Standard
2451 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2452 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2455 \begin_layout Subsection
2456 Horizontal Scrolling
2457 \begin_inset Index idx
2460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2461 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2469 \begin_layout Standard
2471 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2473 \begin_inset space ~
2476 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2477 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2478 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2482 \begin_layout Standard
2483 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2487 \begin_layout Itemize
2489 is used on a small tablet computer
2492 \begin_layout Itemize
2493 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2505 \begin_inset space ~
2518 \begin_layout Itemize
2519 Math constructs with long command names
2522 \begin_layout Standard
2523 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2524 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2526 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2527 window so that table
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2534 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2539 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2541 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2542 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 \begin_inset Float table
2553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2554 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2559 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2563 Horizontal scrolling test.
2571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2573 \begin_inset Tabular
2574 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2575 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2620 \begin_layout Section
2621 Input/Word Completion
2622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2624 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2629 \begin_inset Index idx
2632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2639 \begin_inset Index idx
2642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2675 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2677 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2678 is used to propose completions.
2681 \begin_layout Standard
2682 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2685 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2690 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2697 \begin_inset space ~
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2706 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2710 \begin_inset space ~
2715 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2716 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2720 \begin_inset space ~
2726 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2727 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2728 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2729 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2734 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2735 completions available.
2740 key to accept a proposed completion.
2741 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2742 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2743 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2746 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2755 ing options for text.
2757 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2759 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2761 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2764 he special math option
2768 enables characters to be composed.
2770 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2772 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2776 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2779 you want to insert the character
2780 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2784 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2787 input the characters
2788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2800 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2802 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2806 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2808 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2813 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2818 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2821 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2823 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2826 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2831 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2833 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2837 's installation folder.
2839 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2840 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2847 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2852 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2853 In the example above,
2858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_layout Section
2892 \begin_inset Index idx
2895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2902 \begin_inset Index idx
2905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2934 \begin_inset Index idx
2937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2968 \begin_layout Standard
2969 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2983 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2986 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2990 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2991 \begin_inset space ~
2995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2997 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3004 \begin_layout Standard
3008 \begin_inset space ~
3016 \begin_inset space ~
3037 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3041 \begin_layout Labeling
3042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3046 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3047 LatexCommand nomenclature
3049 description "Tabulator key"
3056 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3058 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3059 \begin_inset space ~
3063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3065 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3072 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3076 , especially section
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3083 reference "subsec:Lists"
3089 If you are still confused, look in the
3094 \begin_inset Newline newline
3102 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3103 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3107 \begin_layout Labeling
3108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3112 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3113 LatexCommand nomenclature
3115 description "Escape key"
3123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3130 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3131 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3134 \begin_layout Labeling
3135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3140 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3141 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3145 \begin_layout Standard
3146 There are three modifier keys:
3149 \begin_layout Labeling
3150 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3169 LatexCommand nomenclature
3171 description "Control key"
3176 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3177 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3181 \begin_layout Itemize
3190 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3193 \begin_layout Itemize
3202 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3205 \begin_layout Itemize
3214 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3218 \begin_layout Labeling
3219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3237 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3238 LatexCommand nomenclature
3240 description "Shift key"
3245 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3246 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3249 \begin_layout Labeling
3250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3268 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3269 LatexCommand nomenclature
3271 description "Alt or Meta key"
3276 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3277 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3278 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3284 \begin_inset Newline newline
3287 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3289 menu accelerator keys
3292 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3293 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3297 \begin_layout Standard
3298 For example, the sequence
3299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3305 \begin_inset space ~
3309 \begin_inset space ~
3315 \begin_inset space ~
3323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3342 \begin_inset space ~
3348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3358 \begin_layout Standard
3363 manual lists all other things bound to the
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3374 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3376 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3377 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3379 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3380 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3381 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3383 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3399 followed by a capital
3406 \begin_layout Chapter
3409 \begin_inset Index idx
3412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 \begin_layout Section
3424 \begin_inset Index idx
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 \begin_layout Subsection
3440 \begin_layout Standard
3441 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3442 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3443 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3444 numbering schemes, and so on.
3445 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3446 and format the title of your document differently.
3449 \begin_layout Standard
3454 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3455 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3456 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3457 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3458 picks one for you by default.
3459 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3462 \begin_layout Subsection
3464 \begin_inset Index idx
3467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3476 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3483 \begin_layout Standard
3484 You can select a class using the
3486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3491 \begin_inset Index idx
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3509 \begin_layout Standard
3510 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3515 \begin_layout Description
3516 Article for basic articles
3519 \begin_layout Description
3520 Report for basic reports
3523 \begin_layout Description
3524 Book for writing a book
3527 \begin_layout Description
3528 Letter for US-style letters
3531 \begin_layout Standard
3532 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3533 only uses if you have installed
3534 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3535 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 distributions will include
3538 Here are some of the classes.
3539 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3541 Special Document Classes
3550 \begin_layout Description
3551 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3554 \begin_layout Description
3555 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3559 \begin_layout Description
3560 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3564 \begin_layout Description
3565 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3566 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3567 There are three article layouts available.
3568 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3569 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3570 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3571 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3576 sequential numbering
3577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3580 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3581 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3582 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3583 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3586 \begin_layout Description
3587 Beamer Layout for presentations
3590 \begin_layout Description
3591 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3592 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3593 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3594 with \SpecialChar LyX
3598 \begin_layout Description
3599 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3602 \begin_layout Description
3604 \begin_inset space ~
3607 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3610 \begin_layout Description
3611 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3614 \begin_layout Description
3615 Foils Used to make transparencies
3618 \begin_layout Description
3619 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3620 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3621 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3622 with \SpecialChar LyX
3626 \begin_layout Description
3627 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3628 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3631 \begin_layout Description
3632 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3635 \begin_layout Description
3636 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3639 \begin_layout Description
3640 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3641 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3642 (Is used by this document.)
3645 \begin_layout Description
3646 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3649 \begin_layout Description
3650 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3653 \begin_layout Description
3658 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3659 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3661 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3665 \begin_layout Description
3666 Slides Used to make transparencies
3669 \begin_layout Description
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3674 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3675 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3678 \begin_layout Description
3679 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3682 \begin_layout Standard
3683 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3685 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3687 Special Document Classes
3694 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3695 of the document classes.
3698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3702 \begin_layout Standard
3703 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3708 \begin_inset Index idx
3711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3728 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3729 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3731 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3734 \begin_layout Standard
3737 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3742 , are highly specialized.
3744 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3745 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3746 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3747 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3748 by some document class.
3749 There are just too many of them.
3750 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3753 \begin_layout Standard
3754 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3762 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3763 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3764 document class for a new file.
3766 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3769 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3776 manual for information on how to install them.
3777 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3783 \begin_layout Standard
3784 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3785 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3786 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3787 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3788 class files to be used for dissertation
3789 s submitted to those universities.
3790 The \SpecialChar LyX
3791 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3793 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3797 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3803 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3810 name "subsec:Modules"
3815 \begin_inset Index idx
3818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3828 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3829 chosen document class.
3830 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3831 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3842 \begin_inset Index idx
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3852 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3856 \begin_layout Standard
3857 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3858 packages or file format converters that are not always
3859 installed by default.
3861 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3862 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3863 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3864 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3866 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3867 file without the missing prerequisites.
3868 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3869 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3876 \begin_inset Index idx
3879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3880 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3887 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3891 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3895 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3904 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3906 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3917 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3920 \begin_layout Standard
3921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3929 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3931 will advise you about these things.
3939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3943 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3948 \begin_inset Index idx
3951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 Document ! Local Layout
3960 \begin_layout Standard
3961 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3962 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3963 : They are intended to be used in
3964 a variety of different documents.
3965 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3966 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3967 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3968 need a specific inset or
3969 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3971 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3974 style only that one time.
3975 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3977 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3995 manual for information on how to use it.
3998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4002 \begin_layout Standard
4003 Each class has a default set of options.
4004 Here's a quick table describing them:
4007 \begin_layout Standard
4008 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4014 \begin_layout Standard
4016 \begin_inset Tabular
4017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4018 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4021 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4023 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4477 \begin_layout Standard
4478 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4484 \begin_layout Standard
4485 You're probably also wondering what
4486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4490 \begin_inset space ~
4494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4498 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4499 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4504 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4509 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4519 headings, there are also
4527 headings, and so on.
4528 We will describe these headings fully in section
4529 \begin_inset space ~
4533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4535 reference "subsec:Headings"
4542 \begin_layout Subsection
4544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4546 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4551 \begin_inset Index idx
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4561 \begin_inset Index idx
4564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4573 \begin_layout Standard
4574 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4583 \begin_inset space ~
4591 \begin_inset space ~
4596 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4598 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4599 doesn't support special options you want to
4600 use for your document.
4601 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4602 -class and its options, you have to read
4606 \begin_layout Standard
4608 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4616 \begin_inset space ~
4623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4629 \begin_inset space ~
4634 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4635 You can choose between the following five options:
4638 \begin_layout Labeling
4639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4644 Use default page style of current class.
4647 \begin_layout Labeling
4648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4653 No page numbers or headings.
4656 \begin_layout Labeling
4657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4665 \begin_layout Labeling
4666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4671 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4672 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4673 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4674 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4677 \begin_layout Labeling
4678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4683 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4684 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4690 \begin_inset Index idx
4693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4701 How they are defined is explained in section
4702 \begin_inset space ~
4706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4708 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4716 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4717 \begin_inset space ~
4721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4723 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4730 \begin_layout Subsection
4731 Paper Size and Orientation
4732 \begin_inset Index idx
4735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4736 Document ! Paper size
4742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4744 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4751 \begin_layout Standard
4752 You can find the following options in the menu
4755 \begin_inset space ~
4762 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4766 \begin_inset Index idx
4769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4778 \begin_layout Labeling
4779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4783 \begin_inset space ~
4788 What size paper to print on.
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Itemize
4805 \begin_layout Itemize
4811 \begin_layout Itemize
4817 \begin_layout Itemize
4820 US letter, US legal, US executive
4823 \begin_layout Itemize
4829 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 \begin_layout Labeling
4837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4842 To choose whether to output as
4853 \begin_layout Labeling
4854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4858 \begin_inset space ~
4863 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4864 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4867 \begin_layout Subsection
4869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4871 name "subsec:Margins"
4876 \begin_inset Index idx
4879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4886 \begin_inset Index idx
4889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4898 \begin_layout Standard
4899 Paper margins are set in the menu
4901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4905 \begin_inset Index idx
4908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4917 \begin_layout Standard
4918 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4919 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4920 the paper format and the font size into account.
4923 \begin_layout Subsection
4927 \begin_layout Standard
4928 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4929 has to convert everything into the new
4931 That includes the paragraph environments.
4932 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4933 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4934 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4936 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4945 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4947 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4948 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4949 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4952 \begin_layout Section
4953 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4954 \begin_inset Index idx
4957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4958 Paragraph ! Indentation
4966 \begin_layout Subsection
4968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4970 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4977 \begin_layout Standard
4978 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4979 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4982 \begin_layout Standard
4983 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4984 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4985 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4986 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4990 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4996 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4997 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4998 language than English.
5000 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5005 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5006 into \SpecialChar LyX
5008 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5011 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5013 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5014 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5015 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5022 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5023 goes to produce a printable file.
5028 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5030 gives you the ability globally to change
5034 these pre-coded spacings.
5035 We will explain more later.
5038 \begin_layout Subsection
5039 Paragraph Separation
5040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5042 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5047 \begin_inset Index idx
5050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5051 Paragraph ! Separation
5059 \begin_layout Standard
5067 \begin_inset space ~
5075 \begin_inset space ~
5082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5086 \begin_inset Index idx
5089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5095 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5098 \begin_layout Subsection
5102 \begin_layout Standard
5103 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5106 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5108 \begin_inset space ~
5113 dialog and toggle the
5116 \begin_inset space ~
5121 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5124 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5128 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5129 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5133 \begin_layout Standard
5134 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5135 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5138 \begin_layout Subsection
5140 \begin_inset Index idx
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5144 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5159 \begin_inset Index idx
5162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5171 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5175 \begin_inset space ~
5184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5191 \begin_inset Index idx
5194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5201 installed to use this feature.
5206 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5208 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5210 \begin_inset space ~
5215 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5216 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5219 \begin_layout Section
5220 Paragraph Environments
5221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5223 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5228 \begin_inset Index idx
5231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5232 Paragraph ! Environments
5238 \begin_inset Index idx
5241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5242 Paragraph environments|(
5250 \begin_layout Subsection
5254 \begin_layout Standard
5255 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5267 } \SpecialChar ldots
5277 \begin_inset Newline newline
5280 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5282 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5283 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5284 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5293 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5296 \begin_layout Standard
5297 A paragraph environment is simply a
5298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5305 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5306 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5307 scheme, labels, and so on.
5308 Additionally, you can
5309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5316 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5317 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5318 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5319 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5321 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5323 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5326 \begin_layout Standard
5327 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5328 \begin_inset Graphics
5329 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5335 at the left end of the toolbar.
5337 will change the environment of the
5341 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5342 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5343 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5346 \begin_layout Standard
5355 create a new paragraph using the
5359 paragraph environment.
5361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5368 because if you are in one of these environments:
5371 \begin_layout Itemize
5377 \begin_layout Itemize
5383 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 \begin_layout Itemize
5401 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 \begin_layout Standard
5415 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5419 , rather than resetting it to
5424 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5425 \begin_inset space ~
5429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5431 reference "sec:Nesting"
5438 \begin_layout Subsection
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5443 The default paragraph environment is
5448 It creates a plain paragraph.
5450 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5451 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5452 this manual) are in the
5459 \begin_layout Standard
5460 You can nest a paragraph using the
5464 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5472 \begin_layout Subsection
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5488 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5497 for thanks or contact information.
5498 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5499 places all of this on a separate page
5500 along with today's date.
5501 For other types of documents, the title
5502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5509 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5514 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5528 Here's how you use them:
5531 \begin_layout Itemize
5532 Put the title of your document in the
5539 \begin_layout Itemize
5540 Put the author name in the
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5549 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5555 Note that using this environment is optional.
5556 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5557 will automatically insert today's date.
5558 If you don't want a date, use the option
5560 Suppress default date on front page
5564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5565 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5567 \begin_inset space ~
5575 \begin_layout Standard
5576 You can use footnotes to insert
5577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5584 or contact information.
5587 \begin_layout Subsection
5589 \begin_inset Index idx
5592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5601 name "subsec:Headings"
5608 \begin_layout Standard
5609 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5611 takes care of the numbering for you.
5614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5620 Section headings ! Numbered
5628 \begin_layout Standard
5629 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5633 \begin_layout Enumerate
5639 \begin_layout Enumerate
5645 \begin_layout Enumerate
5651 \begin_layout Enumerate
5657 \begin_layout Enumerate
5663 \begin_layout Enumerate
5669 \begin_layout Enumerate
5675 \begin_layout Standard
5677 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5678 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5679 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5680 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5682 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5684 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5690 \begin_layout Standard
5691 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5692 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5693 You group the book into chapters.
5695 does a similar grouping:
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 is divided into either
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5726 \begin_layout Itemize
5738 \begin_layout Itemize
5750 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 \begin_layout Itemize
5774 \begin_layout Standard
5775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5783 Not all document types use the
5787 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5792 is the top-level heading.
5800 \begin_layout Standard
5805 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5806 labels it with its number,
5807 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5809 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5823 \begin_inset Index idx
5826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5827 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5836 The unnumbered section headings have a
5837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5844 at the end of their name.
5845 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5846 the table of contents, see section
5847 \begin_inset space ~
5851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5860 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5861 Changing the Numbering
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5864 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5871 \begin_layout Standard
5872 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5873 in the Table of Contents.
5874 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5876 Just as certain classes start with
5890 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5900 This is something you can change.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5910 \begin_inset Index idx
5913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5931 you will see two counters.
5936 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5937 numbers a section heading.
5938 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5943 Short Titles of Headings
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5948 Section headings ! Short titles
5954 \begin_inset Argument 1
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5966 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5973 \begin_layout Standard
5974 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5975 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5976 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5977 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5983 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5984 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5985 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5990 \begin_inset space ~
5996 This will insert a box labeled
5997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6001 \begin_inset space ~
6005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6008 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6009 This also works for captions inside floats.
6010 There can only be one short title per title.
6013 \begin_layout Standard
6014 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6022 The following information applies to all section headings:
6025 \begin_layout Itemize
6026 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6030 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6033 \begin_layout Itemize
6034 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6037 \begin_layout Itemize
6038 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6041 \begin_layout Subsection
6045 \begin_layout Standard
6047 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6061 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6062 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6063 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6064 the text they contain.
6065 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6073 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6076 \begin_layout Standard
6077 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6086 when you start a new paragraph.
6087 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6091 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6092 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6093 have to change back to the
6097 environment yourself.
6100 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6109 \begin_inset Index idx
6112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6121 \begin_layout Standard
6122 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6123 time for the differences.
6132 are identical except for one difference:
6136 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6145 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6148 \begin_layout Standard
6149 Here's an example of the
6162 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6164 See – no indentation!
6168 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6169 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6170 the other paragraph.
6173 \begin_layout Standard
6174 Here's another example, this time in the
6181 \begin_layout Quotation
6187 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6188 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6189 the first line, then
6193 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6197 you were quoting other text.
6200 \begin_layout Quotation
6201 Here's a new paragraph.
6202 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6203 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6207 As the examples show,
6211 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6212 They should put quotes in the
6217 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6221 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6224 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6226 \begin_inset Index idx
6229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6236 \begin_inset Index idx
6239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6255 \begin_layout Standard
6260 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6266 \begin_inset Newline newline
6269 Which I did not rehearse!
6273 It could be much worse.
6274 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6276 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6277 indented a bit more than the first.
6278 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 And make things look fine
6288 \begin_inset Newline newline
6294 arg "newline-insert newline"
6300 \begin_layout Standard
6305 does not indent both margins.
6306 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6307 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6310 arg "newline-insert newline"
6316 \begin_layout Subsection
6318 \begin_inset Index idx
6321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6337 \begin_layout Standard
6339 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6349 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6350 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6359 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6360 lets you provide your own label.
6361 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6362 describing some general features of all four of them.
6365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6370 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6372 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6373 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6382 reset the environment to
6386 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6387 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6388 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6392 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6396 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6403 \begin_layout Standard
6404 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6405 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6406 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6408 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6409 you read all of section
6410 \begin_inset space ~
6414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6416 reference "sec:Nesting"
6423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6425 \begin_inset Index idx
6428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6444 \begin_layout Standard
6445 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6449 paragraph environment.
6450 It has the following properties:
6453 \begin_layout Itemize
6454 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6458 \begin_layout Itemize
6460 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6463 \begin_layout Itemize
6464 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6468 \begin_layout Itemize
6469 The items can have any length.
6471 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6472 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6479 \begin_layout Itemize
6484 environment inside another
6488 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6492 \begin_layout Itemize
6493 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6496 \begin_layout Itemize
6498 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6501 \begin_layout Itemize
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6509 reference "sec:Nesting"
6513 for a full explanation of nesting.
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6518 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6527 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6531 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6532 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6535 \begin_layout Itemize
6536 The label for the first level
6540 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6544 \begin_layout Itemize
6545 The label for the second level is a dash.
6549 \begin_layout Itemize
6550 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6554 \begin_layout Itemize
6555 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6559 \begin_layout Itemize
6560 Back out to the third level.
6564 \begin_layout Itemize
6565 Back to the second level.
6569 \begin_layout Itemize
6570 Back to the outermost level.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 These are the default labels for an
6579 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6584 dialog in the submenu
6589 \begin_inset Index idx
6592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6598 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6602 \begin_layout Standard
6603 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6604 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6606 \begin_inset space ~
6610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6612 reference "sec:Nesting"
6619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6621 \begin_inset Index idx
6624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6633 name "sec:Enumerate"
6640 \begin_layout Standard
6645 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6646 It has these properties:
6649 \begin_layout Enumerate
6650 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6654 \begin_layout Enumerate
6655 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6659 \begin_layout Enumerate
6661 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6664 \begin_layout Enumerate
6669 environment resets the counter to one.
6672 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 \begin_layout Enumerate
6686 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6687 Items can have any length.
6690 \begin_layout Enumerate
6691 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6694 \begin_layout Enumerate
6695 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6698 \begin_layout Enumerate
6699 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6703 \begin_layout Standard
6712 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6714 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6715 labels the four different levels in an
6722 \begin_layout Enumerate
6723 The first level of an
6727 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6731 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6736 \begin_layout Enumerate
6737 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6741 \begin_layout Enumerate
6742 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6745 \begin_layout Enumerate
6746 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6751 \begin_layout Enumerate
6752 Back to the third level
6756 \begin_layout Enumerate
6757 Back to the second level.
6761 \begin_layout Enumerate
6762 Back to the outermost level.
6765 \begin_layout Standard
6766 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6770 environment, see section
6771 \begin_inset space ~
6775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6777 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6782 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6787 There is more to nesting
6791 environments than we've stated here.
6792 You should read section
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6799 reference "sec:Nesting"
6803 to learn more about nesting.
6806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6808 \begin_inset Index idx
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6820 \begin_layout Standard
6821 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6825 list has no fixed label.
6826 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6835 of the first line as the label.
6839 \begin_layout Description
6840 Example: This is an example of the
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6849 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6853 \begin_layout Standard
6855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6862 it is meant that the first usage of the
6866 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6868 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6876 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6882 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6884 \begin_inset space ~
6890 \begin_inset space ~
6894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6896 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6900 for more information.) Here is an example:
6903 \begin_layout Description
6905 \begin_inset space ~
6908 Example: This one shows how to use a
6911 \begin_inset space ~
6923 \begin_layout Description
6924 Usage: You should use the
6928 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6929 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6931 It's not a good idea to use a
6935 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6936 You're better off using
6948 paragraphs into them.
6951 \begin_layout Description
6952 Nesting: You can nest
6956 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6962 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6963 them from the first line.
6966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6968 \begin_inset Index idx
6971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6985 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6986 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6999 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7001 Here are its properties:
7004 \begin_layout Labeling
7005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7007 \begin_inset space ~
7010 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7019 of each line as the item label.
7024 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7025 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7026 space as described above.
7029 \begin_layout Labeling
7030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7031 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7032 uses different margins for the item label and the
7033 body of the item text.
7034 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7035 label width plus a little extra space.
7038 \begin_layout Labeling
7039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7041 \begin_inset space ~
7044 width \SpecialChar LyX
7045 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7046 If the label width is larger, the label
7047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7054 into the first line.
7055 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7056 margin of the rest of the item text.
7059 \begin_layout Labeling
7060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7062 \begin_inset space ~
7065 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7070 environment has the same left margin.
7071 \begin_inset Newline newline
7074 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7077 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7079 \begin_inset space ~
7084 dialog (toolbar button
7087 arg "layout-paragraph"
7094 \begin_inset space ~
7099 determines the default label width.
7100 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7109 multiple times instead.
7110 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7120 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7123 \begin_inset space ~
7128 every time you alter a label in a
7133 \begin_inset Newline newline
7136 The predefined default width is the length of
7137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7151 \begin_layout Standard
7156 list the same way as the
7160 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7166 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7175 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7176 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7178 \begin_inset space ~
7182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7184 reference "sec:Nesting"
7188 to learn about nesting.
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 There is yet another feature of the
7196 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7197 left-justifies the item labels by
7199 You can use additional
7203 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7204 justifies the item label.
7209 are documented in section
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7216 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7221 Here are some examples:
7224 \begin_layout Labeling
7225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7226 Left The default for
7233 \begin_layout Labeling
7234 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7235 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7242 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7245 \begin_layout Labeling
7246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7247 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7258 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7261 \begin_layout Subsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7270 \begin_inset Index idx
7273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7282 \begin_layout Standard
7283 The features described in this section require that the module
7285 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7287 is loaded in the document settings.
7288 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7294 \begin_inset Index idx
7297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7308 Custom Enumerate Lists
7309 \begin_inset Index idx
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7313 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7321 \begin_layout Standard
7323 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7329 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7330 There you add the command
7333 \begin_layout Standard
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7354 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7355 Code, look at section
7356 \begin_inset space ~
7360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7362 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7375 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7382 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7383 For capital Roman numerals replace
7395 in the command above.
7396 For Arabic numerals use
7404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7411 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7426 \begin_layout Standard
7428 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7436 You can only number 26
7437 \begin_inset space ~
7440 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7448 \begin_layout Standard
7449 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7450 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7453 \begin_layout Standard
7454 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7457 \begin_layout Enumerate
7458 \begin_inset Argument 1
7461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7487 \begin_layout Enumerate
7488 \begin_inset Argument 1
7491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7514 \begin_layout Enumerate
7519 \begin_layout Enumerate
7520 \begin_inset Argument 1
7523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7547 \begin_layout Enumerate
7548 \begin_inset Argument 1
7551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7578 For this list these commands were used:
7581 \begin_layout Standard
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7600 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7625 makes the label emphasized and
7634 \begin_layout Standard
7635 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7643 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7644 lists until you change the definition.
7652 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7654 \begin_inset Index idx
7657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7658 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7666 \begin_layout Standard
7667 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7670 \begin_layout Enumerate
7671 \begin_inset Argument 1
7674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7693 \begin_inset Note Note
7696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7697 goes back to default numbering
7705 \begin_layout Enumerate
7709 \begin_layout Standard
7713 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7717 \begin_layout Standard
7718 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7723 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7724 to indicate that it is a resumed
7725 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7726 , but in the output.
7729 \begin_layout Standard
7730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7738 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7748 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7750 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7751 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7752 of a normal enumeration.
7753 There, insert the command
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7767 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7771 \begin_layout Enumerate
7775 \begin_layout Enumerate
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7783 \begin_layout Enumerate
7784 \begin_inset Argument 1
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 This enumeration starts at 4
7806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7808 \begin_inset Index idx
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7820 \begin_layout Standard
7821 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7823 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7826 \begin_layout Itemize
7830 \begin_layout Itemize
7831 with standard spacing
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7835 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7837 Add there the command
7841 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7844 \begin_layout Itemize
7845 \begin_inset Argument 1
7848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7867 \begin_layout Itemize
7871 \begin_layout Itemize
7875 \begin_layout Standard
7876 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7883 \begin_inset Index idx
7886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7894 For more information see its documentation,
7895 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7905 \begin_layout Standard
7906 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7908 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7909 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7913 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7916 \begin_layout Enumerate
7917 \begin_inset Argument 1
7920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7928 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7941 \begin_layout Enumerate
7942 with negative indentation
7945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7946 Further Customization
7947 \begin_inset Index idx
7950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7951 Lists ! Customization
7959 \begin_layout Standard
7960 You can also change the style of description lists.
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7970 \begin_layout Standard
7971 changes the description label font, the command
7974 \begin_layout Standard
7980 \begin_layout Standard
7981 sets the list style.
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7985 An example where the command
7988 \begin_layout Standard
7993 itshape, style=nextline
7996 \begin_layout Standard
8000 \begin_layout Description
8002 \begin_inset space ~
8006 \begin_inset Argument 1
8009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8015 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8017 itshape, style=nextline
8027 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8028 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8032 \begin_layout Description
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8037 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8038 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8039 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8042 \begin_layout Standard
8043 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8049 \begin_inset Index idx
8052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8060 For more information see its documentation
8061 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8071 \begin_layout Subsection
8073 \begin_inset Index idx
8076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8087 \begin_inset space ~
8090 Address: An Overview
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8095 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8103 \begin_inset space ~
8109 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8110 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8111 gags on the document.
8112 In contrast, you can use the
8119 \begin_inset space ~
8124 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8125 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8129 \begin_layout Standard
8130 Of course, you're not limited to using
8137 \begin_inset space ~
8146 \begin_inset space ~
8151 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8152 some European academic papers.
8155 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8159 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8166 \begin_layout Standard
8171 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8172 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8176 \begin_inset space ~
8181 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8182 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8183 Here's an example of each:
8186 \begin_layout Right Address
8188 \begin_inset Newline newline
8192 \begin_inset Newline newline
8196 \begin_inset Newline newline
8199 When is it? What is today?
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8206 \begin_inset space ~
8212 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8214 the largest block of text on a single line.
8215 Here's an example of the
8222 \begin_layout Address
8224 \begin_inset Newline newline
8227 Where do I send this
8228 \begin_inset Newline newline
8231 Your post office and country
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8235 As you can see, both
8242 \begin_inset space ~
8247 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8252 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8253 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8259 This makes sense, since
8267 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8268 Thus, you have to use
8275 arg "newline-insert newline"
8280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8281 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8283 \begin_inset space ~
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8292 ) to start a new line in an
8299 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_layout Subsection
8311 \begin_layout Standard
8312 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8313 or list of references.
8315 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8320 \begin_inset Index idx
8323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8337 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8338 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8339 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8340 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8344 in anything else or vice versa.
8350 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8351 The book document classes ignores the
8355 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8359 in a letter document class.
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment does several things for you.
8368 First, it puts the centered label
8369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8377 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8379 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8380 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8381 the subsequent text.
8382 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8384 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8388 \begin_layout Standard
8389 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8393 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8394 The new paragraph will still be in the
8399 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8400 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8403 \begin_layout Standard
8404 \begin_inset Float figure
8411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8413 \begin_inset Graphics
8414 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8422 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8427 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8448 \begin_layout Standard
8449 We would love to demonstrate the
8453 environment, but since this document is in the
8454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8461 class, we can't do this.
8462 We inserted it therefore as figure
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8469 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8474 If you have never heard of an
8475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8482 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8487 \begin_inset Index idx
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8499 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8506 \begin_layout Standard
8511 environment is used to list references.
8512 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8513 only use it at the end of the document.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 When you first open a
8530 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8531 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8547 depending on the document class.
8548 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8549 Each paragraph of the
8553 environment is a bibliography entry.
8558 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8559 Each new paragraph is still in the
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8568 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8570 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8572 handling, have a look at section
8573 \begin_inset space ~
8577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8579 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8586 \begin_layout Subsection
8587 Special Environments
8590 \begin_layout Standard
8592 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8593 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8601 \begin_inset Index idx
8604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8614 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8621 \begin_layout Standard
8627 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8629 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8634 key as a fixed whitespace.
8638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8651 \begin_inset space ~
8656 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8674 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8677 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8680 arg "newline-insert newline"
8697 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8698 So, when you finish using the
8703 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8704 Also, you can nest the
8709 environment inside of others.
8712 \begin_layout Standard
8713 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 arg "newline-insert newline"
8723 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8728 \begin_inset space \space{}
8738 arg "newline-insert newline"
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 arg "newline-insert newline"
8758 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8766 You must put at least one
8770 in any line you want blank.
8771 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8776 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8780 since that will insert
8785 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8788 arg "self-insert \""
8794 \begin_layout Standard
8798 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8802 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8806 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8810 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8814 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8815 printf("Hello World!
8820 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8824 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 This is just the standard
8830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8840 \begin_layout Standard
8846 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8848 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8849 as if you used a typewriter.
8850 \begin_inset Index idx
8853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8854 Paragraph environments|)
8859 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8862 Program Code Listings
8867 \begin_inset space ~
8875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8879 \begin_inset Index idx
8882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8891 \begin_layout Standard
8896 environment is similar to the
8901 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8902 computer console text.
8907 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8921 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8922 you can have empty lines.
8935 \begin_layout Itemize
8936 have a certain language and a text style
8939 \begin_layout Itemize
8940 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8941 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8942 and \SpecialChar TeX
8946 \begin_layout Standard
8947 Because of these properties
8951 works like a typewriter.
8955 \begin_layout Verbatim
8959 \begin_layout Verbatim
8962 The following 2 lines are empty:
8965 \begin_layout Verbatim
8969 \begin_layout Verbatim
8973 \begin_layout Verbatim
8974 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8984 environment is identical to
8988 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8989 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8996 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9000 \begin_layout Section
9001 Nesting Environments
9002 \begin_inset Index idx
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 Nesting ! Environments
9012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9021 \begin_layout Subsection
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9027 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9029 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9031 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9033 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9054 \begin_layout Enumerate
9058 \begin_layout Enumerate
9063 \begin_layout Enumerate
9067 \begin_layout Standard
9068 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9069 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9071 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9073 \begin_inset space ~
9077 \begin_inset space ~
9085 \begin_inset space ~
9089 \begin_inset space ~
9094 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9096 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9099 arg "depth-increment"
9105 arg "depth-decrement"
9119 arg "depth-increment"
9125 arg "depth-decrement"
9129 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9130 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9134 \begin_layout Standard
9135 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9136 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9137 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9138 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9139 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9145 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9147 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9150 \begin_layout Subsection
9151 What You Can and Can't Nest
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9156 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9160 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9161 than a simple yes or no.
9162 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9165 \begin_layout Itemize
9166 Completely unnestable
9169 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9174 \begin_layout Itemize
9175 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9180 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9181 environments have them:
9184 \begin_layout Description
9185 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9186 Can't nest into them.
9190 \begin_layout Itemize
9196 \begin_layout Itemize
9202 \begin_layout Itemize
9208 \begin_layout Itemize
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9221 \begin_layout Description
9223 \begin_inset space ~
9226 Nestable You can nest them.
9227 You can nest other things into them.
9231 \begin_layout Itemize
9237 \begin_layout Itemize
9243 \begin_layout Itemize
9249 \begin_layout Itemize
9255 \begin_layout Itemize
9261 \begin_layout Itemize
9267 \begin_layout Itemize
9273 \begin_layout Itemize
9280 \begin_layout Itemize
9286 \begin_layout Itemize
9293 \begin_layout Description
9294 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9295 You can't nest anything into them.
9299 \begin_layout Itemize
9305 \begin_layout Itemize
9311 \begin_layout Itemize
9317 \begin_layout Itemize
9323 \begin_layout Itemize
9329 \begin_layout Itemize
9335 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9347 \begin_layout Itemize
9353 \begin_layout Itemize
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Itemize
9381 \begin_inset space ~
9387 \begin_layout Itemize
9394 \begin_layout Standard
9395 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9403 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9413 \begin_inset space ~
9416 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9417 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9418 nested section headings violate this.
9426 \begin_layout Subsection
9427 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9428 \begin_inset Index idx
9431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9432 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9440 \begin_layout Standard
9441 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9442 affected by nesting anyhow.
9446 \begin_layout Itemize
9450 \begin_layout Itemize
9454 \begin_layout Itemize
9458 \begin_layout Standard
9460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9468 Figures and tables in
9472 are not affected by this.
9477 Have a look at section
9478 \begin_inset space ~
9482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9484 reference "sec:Floats"
9488 for more information about
9495 \begin_layout Standard
9497 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9498 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9502 \begin_layout Standard
9503 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9511 of its own, it behaves just like a
9512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9519 paragraph environment.
9520 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9524 \begin_layout Standard
9525 Here's an example with a table:
9528 \begin_layout Enumerate
9533 \begin_layout Enumerate
9534 This is (a) and it's nested.
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9539 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9545 \begin_layout Standard
9547 \begin_inset Tabular
9548 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9549 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9551 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9635 \begin_layout Standard
9636 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9643 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9649 \begin_layout Enumerate
9653 \begin_layout Standard
9654 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9657 \begin_layout Enumerate
9662 \begin_layout Enumerate
9663 This is (a) and it's nested.
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9674 \begin_layout Standard
9676 \begin_inset Tabular
9677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9678 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9764 \begin_layout Standard
9765 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9771 \begin_layout Enumerate
9778 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 \begin_layout Standard
9786 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9790 \begin_layout Standard
9791 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9794 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9803 This is (a) and it's nested.
9806 \begin_layout Standard
9807 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9813 \begin_layout Standard
9815 \begin_inset Tabular
9816 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9817 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9904 \begin_layout Standard
9905 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9911 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 \begin_layout Standard
9925 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9931 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9932 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9936 \begin_layout Subsection
9937 Usage and General Features
9940 \begin_layout Standard
9941 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9942 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9951 is the innermost possible depth.
9952 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9955 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 level #1 – outermost
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9965 \begin_layout Enumerate
9970 \begin_layout Enumerate
9975 \begin_layout Itemize
9980 \begin_layout Itemize
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9991 both of them in the example.
9992 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10002 For example, if we tried to nest another
10007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10014 , we would get errors.
10017 \begin_layout Subsection
10019 \begin_inset Index idx
10022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10031 \begin_layout Standard
10032 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10033 We have several examples of nested environments.
10034 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10038 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10039 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10042 \begin_layout Labeling
10043 \labelwidthstring MMM
10044 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10053 \begin_layout Labeling
10054 \labelwidthstring MMM
10055 #2-a This is level #2.
10056 We created it by using
10059 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10065 arg "depth-increment"
10072 \begin_layout Labeling
10073 \labelwidthstring MMM
10074 #3-a This is level #3.
10075 This time, we just enter
10082 arg "depth-increment"
10086 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10090 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10096 arg "depth-increment"
10103 \begin_layout Standard
10108 environment, nested inside of
10109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10117 So, it's at level #4.
10118 We did this by entering
10121 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10127 arg "depth-increment"
10130 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10135 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10151 \begin_layout Standard
10156 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10159 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10165 \begin_layout Labeling
10166 \labelwidthstring MMM
10167 #4-a This is level #4.
10171 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10174 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10179 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10183 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10188 keep nesting things inside
10189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10200 \begin_layout Labeling
10201 \labelwidthstring MMM
10202 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10207 \begin_layout Labeling
10208 \labelwidthstring MMM
10209 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10210 and this is level #6.
10211 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10215 \begin_layout Labeling
10216 \labelwidthstring MMM
10217 #5-b Back to level #5.
10221 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10227 arg "depth-decrement"
10234 \begin_layout Labeling
10235 \labelwidthstring MMM
10239 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 arg "depth-decrement"
10248 , we're back at level #4.
10252 \begin_layout Labeling
10253 \labelwidthstring MMM
10254 #3-b Back to level #3.
10255 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10259 \begin_layout Labeling
10260 \labelwidthstring MMM
10261 #2-b Back to level #2.
10265 \begin_layout Labeling
10266 \labelwidthstring MMM
10267 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10268 After this sentence, we will enter
10272 and change the paragraph environment back to
10279 \begin_layout Standard
10280 We could have also used the
10296 environment in place of the
10301 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10305 Example 2: Inheritance
10308 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10309 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10312 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10321 arg "depth-increment"
10325 \begin_inset Newline newline
10328 which, we will change to the
10336 \begin_layout Enumerate
10341 environment, at level #2.
10344 \begin_layout Enumerate
10345 Notice how the nested
10349 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10353 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10357 \begin_layout Standard
10358 We ended this example by entering
10363 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10367 and reset the nesting depth by using
10370 arg "depth-decrement"
10376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10377 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10386 \begin_inset Argument 1
10389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10390 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10398 \begin_layout Enumerate
10399 This is level #1, in an
10403 paragraph environment.
10404 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10408 \begin_layout Enumerate
10413 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10419 arg "depth-increment"
10423 Now, what happens if we nest an
10427 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10428 label be? An asterisk?
10432 \begin_layout Itemize
10442 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10443 So, its label is a bullet.
10444 (We got here by using
10447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10453 arg "depth-increment"
10456 , then changing the environment to
10464 \begin_layout Itemize
10465 Here's level #4, produced using
10468 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10474 arg "depth-increment"
10478 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10483 \begin_layout Enumerate
10485 to get to level #5.
10486 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10491 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10495 , because we are in the
10503 environment (that is, it is an
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10524 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10535 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10538 \begin_layout Enumerate
10542 arg "depth-decrement"
10545 to decrease the depth after the next
10548 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10555 \begin_layout Enumerate
10557 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10562 \begin_layout Enumerate
10564 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10565 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10569 \begin_layout Enumerate
10570 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10579 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10584 reset the counter for the label.
10588 \begin_layout Enumerate
10592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10598 arg "depth-decrement"
10601 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10602 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10603 into the twofold-nested
10611 \begin_layout Enumerate
10612 The same thing happens if we do another
10615 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10621 arg "depth-decrement"
10624 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10627 \begin_layout Standard
10628 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10633 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10644 The number of other
10648 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10655 The same rule applies for the
10659 environment, as well.
10662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10663 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10666 \begin_layout Enumerate
10667 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10668 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10669 the same detail with how we did it.
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10686 arg "depth-increment"
10693 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10694 the example in parentheses someplace.
10695 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10696 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10697 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10701 \begin_layout Enumerate
10706 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10710 \begin_layout Verse
10711 Now we will add verse.
10712 \begin_inset Newline newline
10715 It will get much worse.
10716 \begin_inset Newline newline
10726 arg "depth-increment"
10736 \begin_layout Verse
10737 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10738 \begin_inset Newline newline
10741 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10742 \begin_inset Newline newline
10748 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10756 \begin_layout Verse
10757 Here comes a table:
10761 \begin_layout Standard
10762 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10768 \begin_layout Standard
10770 \begin_inset Tabular
10771 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10772 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10773 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10774 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10859 \begin_layout Verse
10863 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10873 arg "depth-increment"
10879 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10885 \begin_inset Newline newline
10893 arg "depth-decrement"
10900 \begin_layout Enumerate
10905 : level #1) This is another item.
10906 Note that selecting a
10910 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10911 3 times to put the table inside the
10918 \begin_layout Quotation
10919 We're now ending the
10923 list and changing to
10928 We're still at level #1.
10929 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10930 The next set of paragraphs is a
10931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10938 We will nest both the
10945 \begin_inset space ~
10950 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10954 for the letter body.
10958 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10961 to preserve the depth.
10962 Remember that you need to use
10965 arg "newline-insert newline"
10968 to create multiple lines inside the
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10985 \begin_layout Right Address
10987 \begin_inset Newline newline
10990 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10991 \begin_inset Newline newline
10997 \begin_layout Address
10999 \begin_inset space ~
11005 \begin_layout Quotation
11006 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11010 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11011 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11012 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11013 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11014 as soon as possible.
11015 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11018 \begin_layout Quotation
11019 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11020 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11021 with your order, along with payment.
11024 \begin_layout Quotation
11025 We thank you again for your patience.
11028 \begin_layout Address
11030 \begin_inset Newline newline
11037 \begin_layout Quotation
11038 That ends that example!
11041 \begin_layout Standard
11042 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11043 gives you a lot of power with just
11045 We could have easily nested an
11066 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11069 \begin_layout Subsection
11071 \begin_inset Index idx
11074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11075 Nesting ! Separation
11081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11083 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11093 For example you need two different enumerations:
11096 \begin_layout Enumerate
11101 \begin_layout Enumerate
11106 \begin_layout Enumerate
11110 \begin_layout Standard
11111 \begin_inset Separator plain
11117 \begin_layout Itemize
11123 \begin_layout Standard
11124 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11130 \begin_layout Enumerate
11134 \begin_layout Enumerate
11138 \begin_layout Enumerate
11142 \begin_layout Standard
11143 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11144 list item and use the menu
11146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11147 Separated <Name> Above
11151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11152 Separated <Name> Below
11155 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11156 ) and before or behind it the
11158 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11161 \begin_layout Standard
11162 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11163 (red arrow in LyX).
11164 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11165 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11168 \begin_layout Standard
11169 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11172 arg "paragraph-break"
11179 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11182 \begin_layout Section
11183 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11184 \begin_inset Index idx
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11196 \begin_layout Standard
11197 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11198 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11200 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11201 be broken at the end of a line.
11202 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11206 \begin_layout Subsection
11208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11210 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11215 \begin_inset Index idx
11218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11227 \begin_layout Standard
11228 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11229 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11230 ) not to break the line at
11232 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11235 \begin_layout Quote
11236 Further documentation is given in section
11237 \begin_inset Newline newline
11241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11243 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11251 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11266 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11275 A protected space is set with
11277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11278 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11280 \begin_inset space ~
11288 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11294 \begin_layout Subsection
11296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11298 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11303 \begin_inset Index idx
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 Spacing ! Horizontal
11315 \begin_layout Standard
11316 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11319 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11323 The length units are listed in Appendix
11324 \begin_inset space ~
11328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11330 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11341 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11346 \begin_inset Index idx
11349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 Spaces ! Inter-word
11358 \begin_layout Standard
11359 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11360 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11361 at the ends of sentences.
11362 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11363 automatically takes care about this.
11364 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11365 followed by a period; see section
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11372 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11377 To insert a normal space, select
11379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11380 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11390 arg "space-insert normal"
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11400 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11405 \begin_inset Index idx
11408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11426 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11435 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11436 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11437 inside abbreviations:
11440 \begin_layout Quote
11442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11446 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11449 \begin_layout Standard
11450 or between values and units.
11451 Compare for example this:
11452 \begin_inset Newline newline
11456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11460 \begin_inset Newline newline
11463 10 kg (normal space
11466 \begin_layout Standard
11467 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11470 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11472 \begin_inset space ~
11480 arg "space-insert thin"
11486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 You can also insert the following space types:
11494 \begin_layout Description
11496 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11498 \begin_inset space ~
11504 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11508 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11512 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11516 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11518 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11521 space between the arrows.
11522 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11526 \begin_layout Description
11528 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11530 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11537 space A line with a
11538 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11542 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11546 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11550 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11552 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11555 space between the arrows.
11558 \begin_layout Description
11560 \begin_inset space ~
11564 \begin_inset space ~
11567 space A line with a
11568 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11572 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11576 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11579 negative thin space between the arrows.
11582 \begin_layout Description
11584 \begin_inset space ~
11588 \begin_inset space ~
11591 space A line with a
11592 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11596 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11600 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11603 negative medium space between the arrows.
11606 \begin_layout Description
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11612 \begin_inset space ~
11615 space A line with a
11616 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11620 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11624 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11627 negative thick space between the arrows.
11630 \begin_layout Description
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11640 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11644 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11648 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11652 \begin_inset space ~
11656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11659 em) space between the arrows.
11662 \begin_layout Description
11664 \begin_inset space ~
11668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11672 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11676 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11680 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11691 em) space between the arrows.
11694 \begin_layout Description
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11704 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11708 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11712 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11723 em) space between the arrows.
11726 \begin_layout Description
11728 \begin_inset space ~
11732 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11736 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11741 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11748 cm space between the arrows.
11751 \begin_layout Standard
11753 \begin_inset space ~
11757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11759 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11763 lists the different space sizes.
11766 \begin_layout Standard
11767 \begin_inset Float table
11774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11775 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11780 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11784 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11794 \begin_inset Tabular
11795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11796 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11895 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11901 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11912 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11923 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11929 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11940 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11970 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12127 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12129 \begin_inset Index idx
12132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12143 feature for adding extra space
12144 in a uniform fashion.
12145 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12146 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12147 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12148 equally between themselves.
12151 \begin_layout Standard
12152 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12155 \begin_layout Quote
12157 This is on the left side
12158 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12161 This is on the right
12164 \begin_layout Quote
12167 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12171 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12177 \begin_layout Quote
12180 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12184 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12188 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12194 \begin_layout Standard
12195 That was an example in the
12201 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12205 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12209 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12212 is one in a standard paragraph.
12213 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12217 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12221 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12224 \begin_inset space ~
12229 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12232 \begin_layout Standard
12234 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12238 \begin_inset space ~
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12246 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_layout Standard
12258 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12268 \begin_layout Standard
12270 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12282 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12284 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12288 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12289 (= opened downwards)
12292 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12296 \begin_inset space ~
12302 \begin_layout Standard
12304 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12306 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12310 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12314 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12318 \begin_inset space ~
12324 \begin_layout Standard
12325 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12333 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12337 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12339 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12340 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12344 option in the space dialog.
12352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12356 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12361 \begin_inset Index idx
12364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12373 \begin_layout Standard
12374 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12375 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12378 \begin_layout Standard
12379 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12382 What is correct English?:
12383 \begin_inset Newline newline
12387 \begin_inset Newline newline
12391 \begin_inset space ~
12394 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12395 \begin_inset Newline newline
12399 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12410 \begin_inset Newline newline
12414 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12425 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12433 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12438 \begin_inset space ~
12442 \begin_inset space ~
12446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12450 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12453 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12457 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12463 \begin_inset space ~
12467 \begin_inset space ~
12471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12474 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12483 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12484 That is why it is named
12485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12493 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12494 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12498 \begin_layout Subsection
12500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12502 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12507 \begin_inset Index idx
12510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 \begin_layout Standard
12520 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12523 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12525 \begin_inset space ~
12531 There you find the following sizes:
12534 \begin_layout Standard
12547 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12548 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12553 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12556 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12564 \begin_inset Index idx
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12568 Document ! Settings
12573 for the paragraph separation.
12574 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12583 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12587 \begin_layout Standard
12589 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12598 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12599 size including line spacing.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12610 \begin_inset Index idx
12613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12619 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12620 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12625 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12626 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12635 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12644 s are described in section
12645 \begin_inset space ~
12649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12651 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12660 If there are several
12664 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12665 You can therefore use
12669 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12677 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12684 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12691 \begin_layout Standard
12692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12702 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12703 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12715 \begin_layout Subsection
12716 Paragraph Alignment
12717 \begin_inset Index idx
12720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 Paragraph ! Alignment
12729 \begin_layout Standard
12730 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12735 dialog (toolbar button
12738 arg "layout-paragraph"
12742 There are five possibilities:
12745 \begin_layout Itemize
12753 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12759 \begin_layout Itemize
12767 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12773 \begin_layout Itemize
12781 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12787 \begin_layout Itemize
12795 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12801 \begin_layout Itemize
12809 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12815 \begin_layout Standard
12816 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12817 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12818 the left and right margins.
12819 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12822 \begin_layout Standard
12824 This paragraph is right aligned,
12827 \begin_layout Standard
12829 this one is centered,
12832 \begin_layout Standard
12834 this one is left aligned.
12837 \begin_layout Subsection
12839 \begin_inset Index idx
12842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12843 Page breaks ! Forced
12849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12851 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12858 \begin_layout Standard
12859 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12860 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12861 force a page break where you want one.
12862 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12863 is good at page breaking.
12864 Only if you use a lot of
12868 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12869 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12872 \begin_layout Standard
12873 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12874 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12878 have to change the page breaking.
12881 \begin_layout Standard
12882 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12884 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12886 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12887 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12889 \begin_inset space ~
12895 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12898 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12900 \begin_inset space ~
12905 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12907 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12908 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12911 \begin_layout Standard
12912 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12913 at the top of a page.
12914 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12916 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12917 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12918 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12922 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12926 to learn more about
12933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12937 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12942 \begin_inset Index idx
12945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12946 Page breaks ! Clear
12954 \begin_layout Standard
12955 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12956 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12957 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12958 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12959 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12962 \begin_layout Standard
12963 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12966 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12968 \begin_inset space ~
12974 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12977 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12988 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12989 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12990 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
12994 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12996 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
12997 Suppressing Page Breaks
13000 \begin_inset Index idx
13003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13005 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13009 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13018 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13022 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13027 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13031 \begin_layout Standard
13033 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13034 To discourage page break at
13035 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13037 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13038 certain point you can use
13042 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13044 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13047 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13049 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13056 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13057 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13058 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13059 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13064 \begin_layout Subsection
13066 \begin_inset Index idx
13069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13078 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13085 \begin_layout Standard
13086 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13088 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13093 \begin_inset space ~
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13105 arg "newline-insert newline"
13109 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13114 \begin_inset space ~
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13126 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13129 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13131 This is useful to avoid
13132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13139 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13144 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13146 very good at line breaking.
13147 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13148 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13155 reference "sec:Quote"
13160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13162 reference "sec:Verse"
13167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13169 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13176 \begin_layout Subsection
13178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13180 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13185 \begin_inset Index idx
13188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13197 \begin_layout Standard
13199 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13210 \begin_layout Standard
13214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13215 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13217 \begin_inset space ~
13222 you can insert horizontal lines.
13223 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13224 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13225 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13228 \begin_layout Standard
13230 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13241 \begin_layout Section
13242 Characters and Symbols
13245 \begin_layout Standard
13246 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13247 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13248 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13260 for information on how this is done.
13263 \begin_layout Standard
13264 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13269 dialog via the menu
13271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13272 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13278 \begin_layout Standard
13279 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13287 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13288 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13290 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13298 \begin_layout Section
13299 Fonts and Text Styles
13300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13302 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13309 \begin_layout Subsection
13311 \begin_inset Index idx
13314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13323 \begin_layout Standard
13324 There are two types of fonts:
13327 \begin_layout Description
13329 \begin_inset space ~
13333 \begin_inset Index idx
13336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13342 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13347 characters) in the font.
13348 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13349 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13350 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13351 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13352 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13353 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13354 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13355 \begin_inset Newline newline
13358 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13359 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13360 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13361 sizes than at small ones.
13362 \begin_inset Newline newline
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13384 \begin_layout Description
13386 \begin_inset space ~
13390 \begin_inset Index idx
13393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13399 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13400 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13401 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13402 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13403 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13404 image manipulation program.
13405 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13406 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13407 \begin_inset space ~
13410 pixels high up to 34
13411 \begin_inset space ~
13414 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13415 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13416 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13418 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13419 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13420 \begin_inset Newline newline
13423 Bitmap fonts are named
13426 \begin_inset space ~
13431 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13434 \begin_layout Standard
13435 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13436 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13437 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13438 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13439 use scalable fonts.
13442 \begin_layout Standard
13443 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13446 \begin_layout Standard
13447 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13449 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13451 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13454 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13455 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13456 font, to emphasize text you use an
13457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13465 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13467 In \SpecialChar LyX
13468 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13472 \begin_layout Subsection
13475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13477 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13484 \begin_layout Standard
13485 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13486 used its own fonts.
13487 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13488 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13491 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13492 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13493 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13494 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13495 to a word processor.
13496 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13497 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13498 files are very portable across
13499 different machines.
13500 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13501 has increased a lot
13502 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13505 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13513 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13518 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13519 code in the document
13520 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13523 \begin_layout Standard
13524 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13525 engines that are also able directly
13526 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13528 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13530 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13532 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13533 that is installed on your system.
13534 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13537 \begin_layout Standard
13538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13546 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13547 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13555 \begin_layout Subsection
13556 Document Font and Font size
13557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13559 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13564 \begin_inset Index idx
13567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13574 \begin_inset Index idx
13577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13586 \begin_layout Standard
13587 You can set the document fonts in the
13589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13593 \begin_inset Index idx
13596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 Document ! Settings
13607 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13608 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13620 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13625 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13628 \begin_layout Standard
13633 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13634 This requires that you use
13646 as the output format, i.
13647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13651 \begin_inset space \space{}
13654 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13655 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13656 installed (see section
13657 \begin_inset space ~
13661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13663 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13668 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13670 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13671 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13673 \begin_inset space ~
13676 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13677 cannot determine the family.
13678 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13679 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13682 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13685 \begin_layout Standard
13686 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13687 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13692 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13698 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13700 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13702 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13705 font encoding, this is
13706 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13707 , depending on the document language,
13710 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13711 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13719 \begin_inset space ~
13725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13735 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13736 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13758 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13779 European Computer Modern
13782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13790 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13793 \begin_layout Standard
13798 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13799 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13804 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13807 \begin_inset space ~
13812 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13818 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13819 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13822 \begin_layout Itemize
13826 \begin_inset space ~
13831 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13844 \begin_inset space ~
13849 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13850 community in order to replace
13854 as the default font.
13855 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13856 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13859 \begin_inset space ~
13872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13873 One difference is improved kerning.
13881 \begin_layout Itemize
13882 If you do not like the look of
13890 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13895 \begin_inset space ~
13901 \begin_inset space ~
13911 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13912 \begin_inset space ~
13915 serif and typewriter fonts,
13919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13920 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13927 \begin_inset space ~
13936 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13941 \begin_inset space \space{}
13949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13953 \begin_inset space \space{}
13959 \begin_inset space ~
13967 \begin_inset space ~
13977 but you can also select your own.
13978 \begin_inset Newline newline
13981 The differences between roman,
13984 \begin_inset space ~
13993 fonts are explained in section
13994 \begin_inset space ~
13998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14000 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14005 \begin_inset Newline newline
14011 \begin_inset space ~
14016 was originally designed for newspapers.
14017 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14018 into the small newspaper columns.
14022 \begin_inset space ~
14027 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14030 \begin_layout Standard
14031 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14044 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14049 depends on the class you are using.
14050 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14053 \begin_layout Standard
14054 Note that the font size is the
14059 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14060 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14061 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14062 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14065 \begin_inset space ~
14071 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14072 \begin_inset space ~
14076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14078 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14085 \begin_layout Standard
14089 \begin_inset space ~
14094 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14096 \begin_inset space ~
14099 serif or typewriter.
14104 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14114 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14117 \begin_layout Standard
14122 LaTeX font encoding
14124 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14125 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14131 \begin_inset Index idx
14134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14142 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14144 \begin_inset space ~
14148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14150 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14157 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14158 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14159 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14163 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14171 \begin_layout Standard
14172 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14174 Use Old Style Figures
14178 Use True Small Caps
14181 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14184 Use Old Style Figures
14186 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14188 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14196 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14200 Use True Small Caps
14202 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14203 of scaled capitals.
14204 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14205 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14206 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14210 \begin_layout Standard
14212 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14213 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14214 provided by the font package (or the
14218 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14223 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14229 \begin_layout Standard
14234 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14235 a font to display the script characters.
14239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14240 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14246 \begin_inset Index idx
14249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14256 So this has no effect for the document language
14272 \begin_layout Standard
14275 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14277 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14278 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14284 \begin_inset Index idx
14287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14289 packages ! microtype
14298 \begin_layout Standard
14301 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14303 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14308 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14309 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14315 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14316 \begin_inset space ~
14320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14322 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14332 \begin_layout Standard
14333 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14345 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14350 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14351 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14353 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14358 dialog, see section
14359 \begin_inset space ~
14363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14365 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14377 \begin_layout Subsection
14381 \begin_layout Standard
14382 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14383 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14385 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14386 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14387 choose a math font in the dialog
14389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14393 \begin_inset Index idx
14396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14397 Document ! Settings
14403 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14404 automatically selects a math font.
14405 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14406 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14415 \begin_inset space ~
14421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14426 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14427 document font is available.
14430 \begin_layout Standard
14431 Note that the math font will not be used for
14435 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14441 or by the insertion of the command
14448 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14449 \begin_inset space ~
14453 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14454 while the math characters do not.
14456 \begin_inset space ~
14459 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14462 \begin_inset space ~
14470 \begin_inset space ~
14475 in the document font settings.
14478 \begin_layout Standard
14479 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14480 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14481 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14482 font (in most cases
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14489 \begin_inset space ~
14495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14498 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14499 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset space ~
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14519 \begin_layout Subsection
14521 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14523 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14527 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14531 name "subsec:charstyles"
14538 \begin_inset Index idx
14541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14548 \begin_inset Index idx
14551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14560 \begin_layout Standard
14561 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14562 automatically changes the
14563 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14566 style for certain paragraph environments.
14568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14569 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14571 This is where we meet the concept of
14577 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14579 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14583 \begin_layout Standard
14585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14614 e., available with all document classes.
14615 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14619 for specific purposes.
14620 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14623 \begin_layout Standard
14625 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14626 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14636 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14640 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 — you customized the
14658 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14659 among them, encourage the use of
14671 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14672 \begin_inset space ~
14676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14678 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14683 Rather than fiddling with
14687 , they encourage the use of
14691 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14696 \begin_inset Quotes els
14700 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14703 ), not their form (
14704 \begin_inset Quotes els
14708 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14712 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14713 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14714 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14715 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14716 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14717 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14723 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14727 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14728 With a semantic markup (such as
14732 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14737 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14739 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14740 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14743 \begin_layout Standard
14745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14746 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14747 by \SpecialChar LyX
14753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14756 Builtin Text Styles
14757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14759 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14769 The two builtin text styles can be
14770 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14774 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14778 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14779 both of these styles
14782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14790 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14801 style, do one of the following:
14804 \begin_layout Itemize
14805 click on the toolbar button
14814 \begin_layout Itemize
14815 use the key binding
14822 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14826 \begin_layout Itemize
14828 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14836 arg "dialog-show character"
14842 arg "dialog-show character"
14845 ) as described in section
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14852 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14861 \begin_layout Standard
14862 These commands are all toggles.
14867 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14870 \begin_layout Standard
14871 One typically uses the
14875 style for proper names.
14877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14884 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14894 \begin_layout Standard
14896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14901 is producing text in
14905 , but the definition can be changed.
14910 \begin_layout Standard
14912 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14914 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14922 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14929 \begin_layout Itemize
14930 clicking on the toolbar button
14939 \begin_layout Itemize
14940 using the keybindings
14947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14951 \begin_layout Itemize
14953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14961 arg "dialog-show character"
14967 arg "dialog-show character"
14970 ) as described in section
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14977 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14986 \begin_layout Standard
14991 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14995 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14998 packages use a different font
14999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15000 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15006 \begin_layout Standard
15007 We've been using the
15011 style all over the place in this document.
15012 Here's one more example:
15015 \begin_layout Quotation
15019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15027 \begin_layout Standard
15028 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15029 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15030 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15031 the common tendency to overuse
15032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15039 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15045 \begin_layout Standard
15047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15048 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15049 only as font changes and integrated in the
15057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15060 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15067 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15069 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15073 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15076 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15078 \begin_inset space ~
15081 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15083 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
15089 arg "dialog-show character"
15095 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15103 arg "dialog-show character"
15107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
15111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15117 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15124 \begin_layout Standard
15126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15127 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15129 \begin_inset space ~
15133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15135 reference "subsec:Modules"
15142 ), or local layout settings (see section
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15149 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15154 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15158 markup for specific functions.
15159 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15164 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15174 \begin_inset Quotes els
15178 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15187 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15197 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15198 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15203 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15204 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15205 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15210 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15211 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15216 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15224 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15225 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15226 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15227 \begin_inset Flex Code
15230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15241 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15246 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15255 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15269 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15270 on screen their formal appearance.
15275 \begin_layout Subsection
15277 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15279 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15283 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15289 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15305 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15310 \begin_inset Index idx
15313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15323 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15327 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15329 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15335 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15336 the properties of text passages
15337 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15341 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15342 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15343 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15344 from ordinary dialog.
15345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15349 \begin_layout Standard
15351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15352 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15353 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15354 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15355 the properties of the respective text passages.
15360 comes in as a last resort.
15365 \begin_layout Standard
15366 Before we document how to
15367 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15368 use custom character style
15369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15370 tweak the text properties
15372 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15373 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15375 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15379 \begin_inset Newline newline
15382 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15383 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15386 \begin_layout Standard
15388 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15389 use custom character styles
15390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15391 tweak text properties
15394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15399 \begin_inset space ~
15402 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15410 arg "dialog-show character"
15415 dialog or press the toolbar button
15418 arg "dialog-show character"
15423 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15426 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15427 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15432 property that you can choose.
15433 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15436 \begin_inset space ~
15441 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15447 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15449 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15454 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15455 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15456 environments all at once.
15459 \begin_layout Standard
15461 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15463 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15466 properties, and their options (in addition to
15469 \begin_inset space ~
15475 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15479 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15487 \begin_layout Labeling
15488 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15502 The possible options are:
15506 \begin_layout Labeling
15507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15512 This is the Roman font family.
15513 Normally a serif font.
15514 It's also the default family.
15524 \begin_layout Labeling
15525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15529 \begin_inset space ~
15536 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15548 \begin_layout Labeling
15549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15556 This is the Typewriter font family.
15562 arg "font-typewriter"
15568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15572 \begin_layout Standard
15574 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15575 The general differences of these families are:
15578 \begin_layout Itemize
15580 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15585 fonts use characters with serifs.
15586 These are the small
15587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15594 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15595 The following example shows the difference:
15596 \begin_inset Newline newline
15600 \begin_inset Newline newline
15605 text without serifs
15608 \begin_inset Newline newline
15611 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15612 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15619 \begin_layout Itemize
15621 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15626 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15627 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15628 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15631 \begin_layout Itemize
15633 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15646 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15664 \begin_inset Newline newline
15668 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15686 \begin_inset Note Note
15689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15691 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15692 For more on phantoms see section
15693 \begin_inset space ~
15697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15699 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15709 \begin_inset Newline newline
15718 \begin_layout Labeling
15719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15724 This corresponds to the print weight.
15729 \begin_layout Labeling
15730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15735 This is the Medium font series.
15736 It's also the default series.
15739 \begin_layout Labeling
15740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15747 This is the Bold font series.
15760 \begin_layout Labeling
15761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15766 As the name implies.
15771 \begin_layout Labeling
15772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15777 This is the Upright font shape.
15778 It's also the default shape.
15781 \begin_layout Labeling
15782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15792 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15802 s the Italic font shape
15808 \begin_layout Labeling
15809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15816 This is the Slanted font shape
15818 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15819 , this is different from italic).
15822 \begin_layout Labeling
15823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15834 This is the Small caps font shape
15841 \begin_layout Labeling
15842 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15847 Alters the text color.
15848 Note that not all DVI
15849 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15851 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15854 viewers are able to display colors.
15856 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15860 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15862 \begin_inset space ~
15869 , which means that the document default color set in
15871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15878 \begin_inset space ~
15884 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15886 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15890 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15970 \begin_inset Index idx
15973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15980 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15986 \begin_layout Labeling
15987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15992 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15993 the language of the document.
15994 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15995 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15996 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15999 in blue to indicate the change
16000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16001 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16005 \begin_inset Newline newline
16008 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16010 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16011 When using the spell checking (see section
16012 \begin_inset space ~
16016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16018 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16022 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16025 \begin_inset Newline newline
16028 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16030 Exclude from Spellchecking
16033 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16036 \begin_layout Labeling
16037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16042 Alters the size of the font.
16044 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16050 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16053 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16054 document font size.
16055 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16056 the details, but a general description of what
16062 \begin_layout Labeling
16063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16084 arg "font-size tiny"
16090 \begin_layout Labeling
16091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16112 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16118 \begin_layout Labeling
16119 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16140 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16146 \begin_layout Labeling
16147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16168 arg "font-size small"
16174 \begin_layout Labeling
16175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16189 It's also the default size.
16193 arg "font-size normal"
16199 \begin_layout Labeling
16200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 arg "font-size large"
16227 \begin_layout Labeling
16228 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16249 arg "font-size larger"
16255 \begin_layout Labeling
16256 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16277 arg "font-size largest"
16283 \begin_layout Labeling
16284 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 arg "font-size huge"
16311 \begin_layout Labeling
16312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16333 arg "font-size giant"
16339 \begin_layout Labeling
16340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16345 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 arg "font-size increase"
16371 \begin_layout Labeling
16372 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16377 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16397 arg "font-size decrease"
16404 \begin_layout Standard
16409 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16410 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16412 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16413 — use those instead.
16414 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16417 \begin_layout Labeling
16418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16420 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16424 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16430 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16431 change a few other things at the character level
16432 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16433 have text passages being underlined
16437 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16438 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16439 days, when you could not change fonts.
16440 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16441 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16442 because some people
16446 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16453 \begin_layout Labeling
16454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16456 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16463 This is text with emphasize on
16466 This might seem like the same as
16470 , but it is actually a bit different.
16476 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16478 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16479 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16483 \begin_layout Labeling
16484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16486 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16491 Don't use underlining.
16496 \begin_layout Labeling
16497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16499 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16522 arg "font-underline"
16528 \begin_inset Newline newline
16532 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16535 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16536 when you could not change fonts.
16537 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16538 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16539 because some people
16543 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16548 \begin_layout Labeling
16549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16553 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16555 \begin_inset space ~
16564 This is text with Double under
16565 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16567 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16576 arg "font-underunderline"
16580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16582 \begin_inset Newline newline
16585 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16586 about double underbar
16591 \begin_layout Labeling
16592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16607 This is text with Wavy under
16608 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16619 arg "font-underwave"
16623 \begin_inset Newline newline
16626 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16627 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16633 \begin_layout Labeling
16634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16636 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16641 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16647 \begin_layout Labeling
16648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16655 Don't use strikethrough.
16658 \begin_layout Labeling
16659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16663 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16665 \begin_inset space ~
16669 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16677 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16680 Single strikethrough
16688 arg "font-strikeout"
16692 \begin_inset Newline newline
16695 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16696 changed in the meantime.
16699 \begin_layout Labeling
16700 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16706 \begin_inset space ~
16710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16726 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16732 \begin_inset Newline newline
16735 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16742 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16743 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16744 \begin_inset space ~
16748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16750 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16757 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16766 This is text with emphasize on
16771 \begin_layout Itemize
16775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16782 This is text with Noun on.
16784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16791 , this is a logical attribute.
16792 Normally it's equivalent to
16795 \begin_inset space ~
16805 \begin_layout Standard
16806 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16807 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16815 chosen a new character style
16816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16817 applied a text property
16820 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16823 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16825 \begin_inset space ~
16828 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16836 arg "dialog-show character"
16844 arg "dialog-show character"
16847 ) dialog, the settings are
16848 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16852 You can activate the
16853 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16856 last applied properties
16858 by using the toolbar button
16861 arg "textstyle-apply"
16865 The button lets you apply
16866 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16867 your custom character style
16868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16871 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16873 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16874 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16875 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16876 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16881 \begin_layout Standard
16882 To completely reset the
16883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16886 text properties of a selection
16888 to the default, use
16889 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16891 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16901 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16906 from the menu of the toolbar button
16909 arg "textstyle-apply"
16916 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16917 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16918 you just set the shape to
16919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16937 \begin_inset space ~
16951 \begin_layout Standard
16953 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16954 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16962 \begin_inset space ~
16974 \begin_layout Itemize
16976 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16989 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17007 \begin_inset Newline newline
17011 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17025 \begin_inset Note Note
17028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17029 For more on phantoms see section
17030 \begin_inset space ~
17034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17036 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17046 \begin_inset Newline newline
17052 \begin_layout Itemize
17054 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17059 fonts use characters with serifs.
17060 These are the small
17061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17068 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17069 The following example shows the difference:
17070 \begin_inset Newline newline
17074 \begin_inset Newline newline
17079 text without serifs
17082 \begin_inset Newline newline
17085 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17086 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17093 \begin_layout Itemize
17095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17100 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17101 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17102 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17107 \begin_layout Standard
17109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17118 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17121 \begin_inset space ~
17126 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17127 the property to be removed.
17128 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17129 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17130 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17148 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17149 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17157 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17161 \begin_inset space ~
17166 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17177 If you, for example, set
17178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17196 \begin_inset space ~
17201 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17210 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17217 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17220 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17221 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17224 \begin_layout Section
17225 Printing and Previewing
17228 \begin_layout Subsection
17232 \begin_layout Standard
17233 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17234 using \SpecialChar LyX
17235 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17236 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17237 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17238 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17240 Additional Features
17245 \begin_layout Standard
17247 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17250 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17251 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17252 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17255 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17256 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17257 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17258 to turn your writing into printable output.
17259 This happens in two stages:
17262 \begin_layout Enumerate
17263 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17264 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17266 a file with the extension,
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17281 \begin_layout Enumerate
17282 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17283 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17284 to use the commands in the
17288 file to produce printable output.
17291 \begin_layout Subsection
17292 Output file formats
17293 \begin_inset Index idx
17296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17305 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17314 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17316 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17320 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17324 \begin_inset Index idx
17327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17329 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17331 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17342 \begin_layout Standard
17343 This file type has the extension
17344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17356 It contains your document as plain text
17357 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17359 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17360 following the rules of the
17361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17364 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17373 \begin_layout Standard
17374 You can export your document to
17375 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17377 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17382 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17383 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17385 \begin_inset space ~
17391 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17392 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17393 bibliography (section
17394 \begin_inset space ~
17398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17400 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17405 If your document includes such material, use
17407 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17408 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_inset space ~
17418 \begin_inset space ~
17426 \begin_inset space ~
17430 \begin_inset space ~
17436 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17437 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17438 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17440 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17446 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17449 \begin_inset Index idx
17452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17462 \begin_layout Standard
17463 This file type has the extension
17464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17475 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17478 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17479 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17480 -Errors or to process it manually
17481 with console commands.
17482 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17483 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17484 's temporary directory whenever you
17485 view or export your document.
17488 \begin_layout Standard
17489 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17490 -file using the menu
17492 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17493 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17497 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17498 export variants are explained in section
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17505 reference "subsec:Export"
17512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17514 \begin_inset Index idx
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17526 \begin_layout Standard
17527 This file type has the extension
17528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17548 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17549 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17550 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17554 \begin_layout Standard
17555 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17556 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17557 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17558 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17559 when you view the DVI.
17560 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17563 \begin_layout Standard
17564 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17566 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17567 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17572 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17573 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17575 \begin_inset space ~
17581 The latter option uses the program
17583 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17589 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17592 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17593 font access (see section
17594 \begin_inset space ~
17598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17600 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17605 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17606 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17613 \begin_inset Index idx
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 File formats ! PostScript
17625 \begin_layout Standard
17626 This file type has the extension
17627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17639 PostScript was developed by the company
17643 as a printer language.
17644 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17646 PostScript can be seen as a
17647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17650 programming language
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17654 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17666 \begin_inset Index idx
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17671 packages ! pstricks
17681 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17684 \begin_layout Standard
17685 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17689 Encapsulated PostScript
17690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17693 (EPS, file extension
17694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17706 As \SpecialChar LyX
17707 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17708 convert them in the background to EPS.
17709 If, for example, you have 50
17710 \begin_inset space ~
17713 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17715 \begin_inset space ~
17718 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17719 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17721 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17722 EPS to avoid this problem.
17725 \begin_layout Standard
17726 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17737 \begin_inset Index idx
17740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17747 \begin_inset Index idx
17750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17759 \begin_layout Standard
17760 This file type has the extension
17761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17777 Portable Document Format
17778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17785 was derived from PostScript.
17786 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17795 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17796 looks exactly the same.
17799 \begin_layout Standard
17800 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17804 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17808 (JPG, file extension
17809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17836 Portable Network Graphics
17837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17840 (PNG, file extension
17841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17853 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17854 converts them in the
17855 background to one of these formats.
17856 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17857 will slow down your workflow.
17858 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17861 \begin_layout Standard
17862 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17864 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17870 \begin_layout Description
17872 \begin_inset space ~
17875 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17879 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17882 \begin_layout Description
17884 \begin_inset space ~
17891 ) This uses the program
17893 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17896 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17899 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17902 is a new engine, derived from
17906 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17907 access (see section
17908 \begin_inset space ~
17912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17914 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17919 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17920 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17925 \begin_layout Description
17927 \begin_inset space ~
17934 ) This uses the program
17939 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17945 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17946 font access (see section
17947 \begin_inset space ~
17951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17953 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17958 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17959 vertically written Japanese.
17962 \begin_layout Description
17964 \begin_inset space ~
17967 (cropped) This is the same as
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17975 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17976 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17977 to generate good-looking
17978 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17981 \begin_layout Description
17983 \begin_inset space ~
17986 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17990 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17994 \begin_layout Description
17996 \begin_inset space ~
17999 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18003 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18004 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18008 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18009 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18016 \begin_inset space ~
18025 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18026 works without problems.
18027 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18028 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18032 \begin_inset space ~
18040 \begin_inset space ~
18045 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18055 \begin_inset Index idx
18058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18059 FileFormats ! XHTML
18065 \begin_inset Index idx
18068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18077 \begin_layout Standard
18078 This file type has the extension
18079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18091 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18092 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18093 When \SpecialChar LyX
18094 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18095 suitable for the purpose.
18096 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18102 between different formats, which are described in section
18104 Math Output in XHTML
18109 \begin_inset space ~
18117 \begin_layout Standard
18118 XHTML output remains
18119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18126 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18127 features are supported yet.
18131 and the World Wide Web
18135 Additional Features
18137 manual, for more information.
18140 \begin_layout Standard
18141 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18143 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18144 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18150 \begin_layout Subsection
18152 \begin_inset Index idx
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18164 \begin_layout Standard
18165 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18166 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18175 or use the toolbar button
18182 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18183 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18190 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18194 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18196 \begin_inset space ~
18200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18202 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18207 Further output formats can be selected via
18209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18210 View (Other Formats)
18212 or the toolbar button
18221 \begin_layout Standard
18222 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18223 viewer window using the menu
18225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18231 Update (Other Formats)
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18237 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18240 To have a real output, export your document.
18243 \begin_layout Section
18244 A few Words about Typography
18245 \begin_inset Index idx
18248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18257 \begin_layout Subsection
18258 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18259 \begin_inset Index idx
18262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18269 \begin_inset Index idx
18272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18281 \begin_layout Standard
18282 In \SpecialChar LyX
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18295 symbol comes in four variants: the
18312 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18318 \begin_layout Standard
18319 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18329 height_special "totalheight"
18334 backgroundcolor "none"
18337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18338 \begin_inset Tabular
18339 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18340 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18342 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18343 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18344 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18414 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 system key combination
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18441 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18453 and the em dash with
18456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 is the Mac label for the right
18479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18492 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18515 system key combination or
18516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18582 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18588 \begin_layout Standard
18589 Dashes can also be inserted with
18591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18593 \begin_inset space ~
18596 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18604 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18605 and 2014 for the en dash).
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18609 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18610 mode and has a length of its own.
18611 Here are some examples:
18614 \begin_layout Enumerate
18615 line- and page-breaks
18616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18626 \begin_layout Enumerate
18628 \begin_inset space ~
18632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18642 \begin_layout Enumerate
18643 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18644 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18654 \begin_layout Enumerate
18655 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18659 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18669 \begin_layout Standard
18671 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18673 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18674 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18682 \begin_layout Subsection
18683 Dashes and Line Breaks
18684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18686 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18693 \begin_layout Standard
18694 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18695 case and locale, e.
18696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18702 \begin_layout Itemize
18703 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18704 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18707 \begin_layout Itemize
18708 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18712 \begin_layout Itemize
18713 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18714 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18717 \begin_layout Standard
18718 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18719 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18730 allows line breaks after hyphens
18731 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18733 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18736 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18739 \begin_layout Enumerate
18740 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18741 \begin_inset space ~
18744 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18746 The Elements of Typographic Style
18749 \begin_inset space ~
18752 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18755 \begin_layout Enumerate
18756 Unwanted line breaks
18761 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18763 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18766 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18773 Prevent Hyphenation
18778 \begin_inset space ~
18794 in \SpecialChar TeX
18796 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18797 , a protected space does not suffice
18801 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18808 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18809 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18810 in the document language.
18811 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18825 \begin_layout Itemize
18827 \begin_inset space ~
18831 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18841 height_special "totalheight"
18846 backgroundcolor "none"
18849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 \begin_layout Itemize
18860 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18870 height_special "totalheight"
18875 backgroundcolor "none"
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 \begin_inset space ~
18888 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18889 \begin_inset space ~
18892 – sont très utiles.
18895 \begin_layout Itemize
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18909 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18913 \begin_layout Standard
18914 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18915 \begin_inset space ~
18918 – in contrast to an overfull line
18919 \begin_inset space ~
18922 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18926 \begin_layout Standard
18927 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18931 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18932 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18933 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18938 \begin_layout Enumerate
18939 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18940 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18941 or \SpecialChar TeX
18947 \begin_layout Itemize
18949 \begin_inset space ~
18952 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18953 \begin_inset space ~
18956 – sont très utiles.
18960 \begin_layout Enumerate
18961 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18962 \begin_inset Newline newline
18967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18968 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18970 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18972 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18974 \begin_inset space ~
18980 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18982 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18984 \begin_inset space ~
18995 \begin_layout Itemize
18996 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18997 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18998 should be followed by
18999 a line break opportunity.
19002 \begin_layout Standard
19003 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19004 \begin_inset space ~
19008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19010 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19021 \begin_layout Enumerate
19022 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19023 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19024 or en dashes (see section
19025 \begin_inset space ~
19029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19031 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19042 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19046 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19048 \begin_inset space ~
19051 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19052 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19061 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19062 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19070 \begin_layout Standard
19071 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19073 \begin_inset space ~
19076 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19078 prevents ligation to dashes.
19080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19087 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19092 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19093 after the input (unless the current text font is
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19102 The behavior was changed since
19103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19118 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19119 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19120 as non-breakable dashes.
19121 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19129 \begin_layout Standard
19132 \begin_inset space ~
19140 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19142 \begin_inset space ~
19145 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19149 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19150 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19151 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19153 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19157 If you used both literal and
19158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19165 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19167 \begin_inset space ~
19170 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19171 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19174 \begin_layout Subsection
19176 \begin_inset Index idx
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19188 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19195 \begin_layout Standard
19196 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19197 but automatically in the output.
19198 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19204 \begin_inset Index idx
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 following the rules of the document language.
19216 does not hyphenate text in the
19220 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19223 \begin_layout Standard
19225 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19229 font and with unusual constructs, like
19230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19238 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19239 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19240 This is done with the menu
19242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19243 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19251 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19253 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19259 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19270 would then see the hyphen
19271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19278 as a line break possibility.
19279 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19280 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19284 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19287 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19289 Prevent Hyphenation
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19302 \begin_layout Subsection
19304 \begin_inset Index idx
19307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19317 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19320 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19327 \begin_layout Standard
19328 When \SpecialChar LyX
19329 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19330 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19332 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19338 appropriate amount of space.
19339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19342 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19344 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19345 gets after another word.
19348 \begin_layout Standard
19349 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19350 not work in all cases.
19352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19363 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19364 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19367 \begin_layout Standard
19368 Here are some examples of
19372 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19375 \begin_layout Itemize
19380 \begin_layout Itemize
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19389 \begin_layout Itemize
19391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19395 this is too much space!
19398 \begin_layout Itemize
19403 \begin_layout Standard
19404 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19407 \begin_layout Standard
19408 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19411 \begin_layout Enumerate
19415 \begin_inset space ~
19420 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19421 \begin_inset space ~
19425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19427 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19432 \begin_inset Index idx
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 Spaces ! inter-word
19444 \begin_layout Enumerate
19448 \begin_inset space ~
19453 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19454 \begin_inset space ~
19458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19460 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19465 \begin_inset Index idx
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19477 \begin_layout Enumerate
19481 \begin_inset space ~
19485 \begin_inset space ~
19489 \begin_inset space ~
19496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19498 \begin_inset space ~
19503 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19504 This function is also bound to
19507 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19513 \begin_layout Standard
19514 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19517 \begin_layout Itemize
19519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19523 \begin_inset space \space{}
19526 this is too much space!
19529 \begin_layout Itemize
19530 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19534 \begin_layout Standard
19535 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19536 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19538 will take care of this.
19541 \begin_layout Standard
19542 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19546 \begin_inset space ~
19552 feature described in the section
19554 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19559 Additional Features
19564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19566 \begin_inset Index idx
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 Typography ! Quotation marks
19576 \begin_inset Index idx
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 Quotation marks | see
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 \begin_layout Standard
19612 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19613 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19614 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 The keyboard character,
19628 , generates this automatically.
19631 \begin_layout Standard
19632 You can specify what character the
19636 key produces by using the submenu
19642 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19646 \begin_inset Index idx
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 Document ! Settings
19655 dialog and switching the
19659 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19660 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19662 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19664 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19668 \begin_inset space ~
19674 \begin_layout Labeling
19675 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19687 \begin_inset space ~
19691 \begin_inset space ~
19695 \begin_inset Quotes els
19699 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19713 \begin_inset Quotes els
19717 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19720 quotation marks (as common, e.
19721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19727 \begin_layout Labeling
19728 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19731 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19735 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19739 \begin_inset space ~
19743 \begin_inset space ~
19747 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19751 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19757 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19761 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19765 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19769 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19772 quotation marks (as common, e.
19773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19779 \begin_layout Labeling
19780 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19783 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19787 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19791 \begin_inset space ~
19795 \begin_inset space ~
19799 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19803 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19809 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19813 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19817 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19821 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19824 quotation marks (as common, e.
19825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19831 \begin_layout Labeling
19832 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19835 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19839 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19843 \begin_inset space ~
19847 \begin_inset space ~
19851 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19855 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19861 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19865 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19869 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19873 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19876 quotation marks (as common, e.
19877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19883 \begin_layout Labeling
19884 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19887 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19891 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19895 \begin_inset space ~
19899 \begin_inset space ~
19903 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19907 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19913 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19917 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19921 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19925 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19928 quotation marks (as common, e.
19929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19932 g., in Switzerland)
19935 \begin_layout Labeling
19936 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19939 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19943 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19947 \begin_inset space ~
19951 \begin_inset space ~
19955 \begin_inset Quotes als
19959 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19965 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19969 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19973 \begin_inset Quotes als
19977 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19980 quotation marks (as common, e.
19981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19987 \begin_layout Labeling
19988 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19991 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19995 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19999 \begin_inset space ~
20003 \begin_inset space ~
20007 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20011 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20017 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20021 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20025 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20029 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20032 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20035 \begin_layout Labeling
20036 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20039 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20043 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20047 \begin_inset space ~
20051 \begin_inset space ~
20055 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20059 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20065 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20069 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20073 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20077 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20080 quotation marks (as common, e.
20081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20084 g., in Great Britain)
20087 \begin_layout Labeling
20088 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20091 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20095 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20099 \begin_inset space ~
20103 \begin_inset space ~
20107 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20111 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20117 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20121 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20125 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20129 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20132 quotation marks (as common, e.
20133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20139 \begin_layout Labeling
20140 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20143 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20147 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20151 \begin_inset space ~
20155 \begin_inset space ~
20159 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20163 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20169 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20173 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20177 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20181 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20184 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20190 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20191 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20192 the inner marks differ).
20200 \begin_layout Labeling
20201 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20204 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20208 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20212 \begin_inset space ~
20216 \begin_inset space ~
20220 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20224 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20230 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20234 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20238 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20242 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20245 quotation marks (as common, e.
20246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20252 \begin_layout Labeling
20253 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20256 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20260 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20264 \begin_inset space ~
20268 \begin_inset space ~
20272 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20276 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20282 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20286 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20290 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20294 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20297 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20298 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20302 \begin_layout Labeling
20303 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20305 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20308 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20312 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20316 \begin_inset space ~
20320 \begin_inset space ~
20324 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20328 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20336 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20352 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20360 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20365 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20370 \begin_layout Labeling
20371 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20372 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20380 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20386 \begin_inset space ~
20390 \begin_inset space ~
20396 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20404 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20408 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20412 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20416 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20420 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20423 quotation marks (as common, e.
20424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20436 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20442 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20443 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20451 \begin_layout Labeling
20452 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20453 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20461 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20467 \begin_inset space ~
20471 \begin_inset space ~
20477 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20485 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20489 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20493 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20497 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20501 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20504 quotation marks (as common, e.
20505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20508 g., in North Korea and China)
20509 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20511 \begin_inset script superscript
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20518 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20533 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20540 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20550 \begin_layout Standard
20551 Inner quotation marks
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20557 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20558 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20566 does not necessarily mean
20567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20575 This is why we call them
20576 \begin_inset Quotes els
20580 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20596 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20598 \begin_inset Quotes els
20602 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20605 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20608 arg "quote-insert inner"
20613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20619 \begin_layout Standard
20620 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20621 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20622 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20623 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20624 If you check the setting
20626 Use dynamic quotation marks
20630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20631 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20634 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20635 they appear in a special color).
20636 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20637 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20642 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20645 \begin_layout Standard
20646 Individual quotation marks (i.
20647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20650 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20651 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20655 \begin_layout Subsection
20657 \begin_inset Index idx
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 Typography ! Ligatures
20667 \begin_inset Index idx
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20701 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20708 \begin_layout Standard
20709 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20710 print them as single characters.
20711 These groups are known as
20716 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20717 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20719 Here are the standard ligatures:
20722 \begin_layout Itemize
20726 \begin_layout Itemize
20730 \begin_layout Itemize
20734 \begin_layout Itemize
20738 \begin_layout Itemize
20742 \begin_layout Standard
20743 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20746 \begin_layout Standard
20747 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20748 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20756 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20772 To break a ligature, use
20774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20775 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20777 \begin_inset space ~
20784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20795 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20812 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20820 \begin_layout Subsection
20822 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20824 \begin_inset Index idx
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 \begin_layout Standard
20840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20841 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20845 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20848 \begin_layout Description
20850 The name of the game.
20853 \begin_layout Description
20855 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20859 \begin_layout Description
20861 The \SpecialChar TeX
20862 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20866 \begin_layout Description
20867 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20868 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20872 \begin_layout Standard
20873 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20879 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20887 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20888 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20889 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20890 converges to the number
20891 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20894 : The actual version is
20895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20903 , the previous one was
20904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20915 \begin_layout Subsection
20917 \begin_inset Index idx
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 \begin_layout Standard
20930 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20931 space between two words.
20932 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20942 for units use the menu
20944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20945 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20947 \begin_inset space ~
20955 arg "space-insert thin"
20961 \begin_layout Standard
20962 Here is an example to show the differences:
20965 \begin_layout Standard
20966 \begin_inset Tabular
20967 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20968 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20969 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20970 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 \begin_inset space ~
20981 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 space between number and unit
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21009 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 half space between number and unit
21034 \begin_layout Subsection
21036 \begin_inset Index idx
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21048 \begin_layout Standard
21049 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21051 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21052 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21053 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21054 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21055 These bits of text became known as
21066 \begin_layout Standard
21067 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21068 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21069 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21070 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21071 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21072 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21073 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21074 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21075 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21076 \begin_inset Newline newline
21084 \begin_inset Newline newline
21092 \begin_inset Newline newline
21095 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21096 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21097 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21099 \begin_inset space ~
21103 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21105 key "latexcompanion"
21111 \begin_inset space ~
21115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21122 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21123 's page break mechanism.
21126 \begin_layout Chapter
21127 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21130 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21137 \begin_layout Standard
21138 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21141 \begin_inset space ~
21147 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21150 \begin_layout Section
21152 \begin_inset Index idx
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21171 \begin_layout Standard
21173 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21176 \begin_layout Description
21179 \begin_inset space ~
21182 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21183 \begin_inset Newline newline
21187 \begin_inset Note Note
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21199 \begin_layout Description
21200 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21201 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21202 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21205 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21206 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21208 \begin_inset space ~
21214 \begin_inset Newline newline
21218 \begin_inset Note Comment
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21231 \begin_layout Description
21233 \begin_inset space ~
21236 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21237 set in the document settings under
21239 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21241 \begin_inset space ~
21247 \begin_inset Newline newline
21251 \begin_inset Newline newline
21255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21265 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21270 of a comment that appears in the output.
21276 \begin_inset Newline newline
21280 \begin_inset Newline newline
21283 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21286 \begin_layout Standard
21287 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21299 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21302 \begin_layout Section
21304 \begin_inset Index idx
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21316 name "sec:Footnotes"
21323 \begin_layout Standard
21325 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21331 or the toolbar button
21334 arg "footnote-insert"
21346 \begin_inset Graphics
21347 filename clipart/footnote.png
21356 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21357 's representation of your footnote.
21367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21386 label, the box will
21390 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21391 Clicking on the box label again will close
21404 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21405 and click on the footnote
21420 \begin_layout Standard
21421 Here is an example footnote:
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21438 \begin_layout Standard
21439 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21440 position where the footnote box is placed.
21441 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21442 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21443 according to the document class.
21445 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21446 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21452 ey are described in the
21455 \begin_inset space ~
21463 \begin_layout Section
21465 \begin_inset Index idx
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21477 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21484 \begin_layout Standard
21485 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21487 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21491 \begin_inset space ~
21496 or the toolbar button
21499 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21525 appearing within your text.
21526 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21527 's representation of your margin
21536 \begin_layout Standard
21537 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21541 \begin_inset Marginal
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 This is a marginal note.
21554 \begin_layout Standard
21555 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21556 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21557 pages, right on odd pages.
21560 \begin_layout Standard
21561 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21564 \begin_inset space ~
21572 \begin_inset space ~
21580 \begin_layout Section
21581 Graphics and Images
21582 \begin_inset Index idx
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 \begin_inset Index idx
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21604 name "sec:Graphics"
21611 \begin_layout Standard
21612 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21613 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21616 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21625 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21628 \begin_layout Standard
21629 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21634 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21635 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21637 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21638 \begin_inset space ~
21642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21644 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21651 \begin_layout Standard
21656 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21657 of the image in the output.
21658 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21662 \begin_inset space ~
21666 \begin_inset space ~
21675 \begin_inset space ~
21679 \begin_inset space ~
21683 \begin_inset space ~
21688 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21689 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21697 \begin_layout Standard
21701 \begin_inset space ~
21705 \begin_inset space ~
21710 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21711 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21713 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21718 \begin_inset space ~
21723 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21724 with the image size is printed.
21727 \begin_layout Standard
21728 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21729 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21731 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21734 \begin_layout Standard
21736 \begin_inset Graphics
21737 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21745 \begin_layout Standard
21746 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21747 the image into a float, see section
21748 \begin_inset space ~
21752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21754 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21761 \begin_layout Subsection
21763 \begin_inset Index idx
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21775 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21782 \begin_layout Standard
21783 You can insert images in any known file format.
21784 But as we explained in section
21785 \begin_inset space ~
21789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21791 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21795 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21797 therefore uses the program
21801 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21802 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21803 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21804 \begin_inset space ~
21808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21810 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21817 \begin_layout Standard
21818 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21821 \begin_layout Description
21823 \begin_inset space ~
21826 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21827 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21828 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21832 Graphics Interchange Format
21833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21836 (GIF, file extension
21837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21849 \begin_inset Index idx
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21884 Portable Network Graphics
21885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21888 (PNG, file extension
21889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21901 \begin_inset Index idx
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21936 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21940 (JPG, file extension
21941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21965 \begin_inset Index idx
21968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 \begin_layout Description
22001 \begin_inset space ~
22004 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22006 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22007 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22008 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22009 \begin_inset Newline newline
22012 Scalable image formats can be
22013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22016 Scalable Vector Graphics
22017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22020 (SVG, file extension
22021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22033 \begin_inset Index idx
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22068 Encapsulated PostScript
22069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22072 (EPS, file extension
22073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22085 \begin_inset Index idx
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22120 Portable Document Format
22121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22124 (PDF, file extension
22125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22137 \begin_inset Index idx
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22155 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22156 result will not be scalable.
22157 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22171 \begin_layout Standard
22172 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22179 \begin_layout Subsection
22180 Grouping of Image Settings
22181 \begin_inset Index idx
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 Images ! Settings grouping
22193 \begin_layout Standard
22194 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22196 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22197 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22199 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22200 need to manually change each of them.
22203 \begin_layout Standard
22204 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22207 \begin_inset space ~
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22223 \begin_inset space ~
22227 \begin_inset space ~
22233 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22234 and checking the name of the desired group.
22237 \begin_layout Section
22239 \begin_inset Index idx
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22258 \begin_layout Standard
22259 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22262 arg "tabular-insert"
22267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22271 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22272 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22273 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22276 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22277 from the rest of the table.
22278 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22279 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22281 Here is an example table:
22284 \begin_layout Standard
22286 \begin_inset Tabular
22287 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22288 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22290 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22490 \begin_layout Standard
22492 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22493 This corresponds to the
22494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22501 table style listed in the style selection.
22504 \begin_layout Standard
22506 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22507 Other available styles include:
22510 \begin_layout Itemize
22512 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22521 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22525 \begin_layout Itemize
22527 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22528 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22531 \begin_layout Itemize
22533 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22542 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22543 bold top/bottom lines (see
22554 \begin_layout Standard
22556 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22557 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22558 button can be changed in
22560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22565 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22569 \begin_layout Subsection
22573 \begin_layout Standard
22574 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22577 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22581 This brings up the table dialog.
22582 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22583 cursor is placed currently.
22584 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22585 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22586 done on all of your selection.
22589 \begin_layout Standard
22590 In addition to the table dialog, the
22593 \begin_inset space ~
22598 helps you in setting table properties.
22599 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22602 \begin_layout Standard
22606 \begin_inset space ~
22611 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22612 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22613 current cell respectively.
22614 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22616 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22617 of text, see section
22618 \begin_inset space ~
22622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22624 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22631 \begin_layout Standard
22632 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22633 using the check box
22642 This will merge the cells to
22646 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22647 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22648 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22649 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22650 in the last row without the upper border:
22653 \begin_layout Standard
22655 \begin_inset Tabular
22656 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22657 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22659 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22660 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 \begin_layout Standard
22793 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22794 -arguments for the table.
22795 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22796 explained in the chapter
22803 \begin_inset space ~
22809 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22810 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22811 but are visible in the output.
22814 \begin_layout Standard
22815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 Most DVI-viewers are
22827 able to display rotations.
22835 \begin_layout Standard
22840 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22845 adds lines for all cell borders.
22848 \begin_layout Subsection
22850 \begin_inset Index idx
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 Tables ! Multi-page
22860 \begin_inset Index idx
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 \begin_layout Standard
22873 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22876 \begin_inset space ~
22880 \begin_inset space ~
22888 \begin_inset space ~
22893 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22894 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22897 \begin_layout Description
22902 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22903 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22904 Except for the first page, if
22907 \begin_inset space ~
22915 \begin_layout Description
22919 \begin_inset space ~
22924 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22925 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22928 \begin_layout Description
22933 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22934 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22935 except for the last page, if
22938 \begin_inset space ~
22946 \begin_layout Description
22950 \begin_inset space ~
22955 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22956 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22959 \begin_layout Description
22960 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22961 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22967 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22970 \begin_inset space ~
22978 \begin_layout Standard
22979 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22980 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22981 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22987 In this context, first means first in this order:
22990 \begin_inset space ~
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23007 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23010 \begin_layout Standard
23012 \begin_inset Tabular
23013 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23014 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23015 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23016 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23017 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23018 <row endfirsthead="true">
23019 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23030 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <row endfirsthead="true">
23050 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23061 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 <row endhead="true">
23083 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23094 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23113 <row endhead="true">
23114 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23125 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 <row endfoot="true">
23147 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23158 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23167 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24139 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24168 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25128 <row endlastfoot="true">
25129 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25140 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25166 \begin_layout Subsection
25168 \begin_inset Index idx
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25180 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25187 \begin_layout Standard
25188 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25189 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25190 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25191 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25195 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25198 \begin_layout Standard
25199 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25200 for the column in the table dialog.
25201 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25202 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25206 \begin_layout Standard
25208 \begin_inset Tabular
25209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25212 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25233 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 This is longer now.
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25415 This is longer now.
25420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 \begin_layout Standard
25447 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25448 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25453 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25454 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25459 Selection with the mouse or with
25463 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25464 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25465 the selection from outside the table.
25468 \begin_layout Section
25470 \begin_inset Index idx
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25489 \begin_layout Subsection
25493 \begin_layout Standard
25494 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25495 have a fixed location.
25497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25504 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25512 \begin_inset space ~
25517 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25518 too many notes on the current page.
25521 \begin_layout Standard
25522 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25523 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25524 and pages without text.
25525 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25526 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25527 Floats are therefore numbered.
25528 Referencing is described in section
25529 \begin_inset space ~
25533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25535 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25542 \begin_layout Standard
25543 To insert a float, use the menu
25545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25549 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25550 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25552 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25553 \begin_inset Index idx
25556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25562 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25563 paragraph within the float.
25564 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25565 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25566 left-clicking on the box label.
25567 A closed float box looks like this:
25568 \begin_inset Graphics
25569 filename clipart/float.png
25574 – a gray button with a red label.
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25580 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25583 \begin_layout Subsection
25585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25587 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 Floats ! Figure floats
25604 \begin_layout Standard
25606 \begin_inset space ~
25610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25612 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25616 was created using the menu
25618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25619 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25625 arg "float-insert figure"
25629 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25638 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25642 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25643 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25645 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25647 \begin_inset space ~
25655 arg "layout-paragraph"
25661 \begin_layout Standard
25662 \begin_inset Float figure
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 \begin_inset Graphics
25672 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25682 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25687 name "fig:A-star-in"
25704 \begin_layout Standard
25705 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25706 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25717 ) and refer to it using the menu
25719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25725 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25729 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25730 vague references like
25731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25738 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25739 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25749 For more about cross-references, see section
25750 \begin_inset space ~
25754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25756 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25763 \begin_layout Standard
25764 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25765 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25766 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25767 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25768 as described in section
25769 \begin_inset space ~
25773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25775 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25781 \begin_inset space ~
25785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25787 reference "fig:Two-images"
25791 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25792 You can also set the images one below the other.
25794 \begin_inset space ~
25798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25800 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25807 reference "fig:Star"
25811 are the subfigures.
25814 \begin_layout Standard
25815 \begin_inset Float figure
25822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25823 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25827 \begin_inset Float figure
25834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25835 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25840 name "fig:Undefinable"
25852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25853 \begin_inset Graphics
25854 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25866 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25870 \begin_inset Float figure
25877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25878 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25896 \begin_inset Graphics
25897 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25909 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25921 name "fig:Two-images"
25938 \begin_layout Subsection
25940 \begin_inset Index idx
25943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25944 Floats ! Table floats
25952 \begin_layout Standard
25953 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25956 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25959 or the toolbar button
25962 arg "float-insert table"
25966 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25967 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25968 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25970 \begin_inset space ~
25974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25976 reference "tab:Table-float"
25983 \begin_layout Standard
25984 \begin_inset Float table
25991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25992 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25997 name "tab:Table-float"
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26011 \begin_inset Tabular
26012 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26013 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26014 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26015 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26143 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26164 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26167 \end{array}\right]$
26175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26188 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26209 \begin_layout Subsection
26211 \begin_inset Index idx
26214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26223 \begin_layout Standard
26225 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26226 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26227 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26229 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26237 \begin_inset space ~
26245 \begin_layout Section
26247 \begin_inset Index idx
26250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26259 \begin_layout Standard
26261 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26263 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26264 \begin_inset space \space{}
26270 \begin_layout Standard
26271 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26272 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26278 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26279 and its alignment within the page.
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26284 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26294 height_special "totalheight"
26299 backgroundcolor "none"
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 This is a minipage.
26306 The text is set in an italic style.
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26312 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26313 another formatting.
26321 \begin_layout Standard
26322 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26325 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26329 as described in section
26330 \begin_inset space ~
26334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26336 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26341 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26347 \begin_layout Standard
26348 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26358 height_special "totalheight"
26363 backgroundcolor "none"
26366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26367 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26368 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26378 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26388 height_special "totalheight"
26393 backgroundcolor "none"
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26398 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26406 \begin_layout Standard
26407 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26413 \begin_layout Standard
26414 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26416 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26423 \begin_inset space ~
26431 \begin_layout Chapter
26432 Mathematical Formulas
26433 \begin_inset Index idx
26436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26443 \begin_inset Index idx
26446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26477 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26484 \begin_layout Standard
26485 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26490 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26493 \begin_layout Section
26495 \begin_inset Index idx
26498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 \begin_layout Standard
26508 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26521 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26523 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26524 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26525 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26533 \begin_layout Standard
26534 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26538 \begin_inset space ~
26543 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26546 \begin_layout Standard
26547 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26548 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26551 \begin_layout Standard
26552 This is a line with an inline formula
26553 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26559 \begin_layout Standard
26560 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26561 paragraph, like this one:
26562 \begin_inset Formula
26569 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26572 \begin_layout Standard
26574 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26576 For example, typing
26577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26590 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26591 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26595 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26598 \begin_inset space ~
26606 \begin_layout Subsection
26607 Navigating in Formulas
26608 \begin_inset Index idx
26611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26622 achieved with the arrow keys.
26624 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26625 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26630 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26631 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26635 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26639 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26642 \end{array}\right]$
26650 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26655 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26656 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26659 \begin_layout Standard
26664 , printed in this document as
26665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26669 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26676 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26677 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26678 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26683 For example, if you want
26684 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26692 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26702 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26706 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26711 , since in the latter case only the
26714 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26719 will be under the square root sign:
26720 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26726 \begin_layout Standard
26727 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26729 \begin_inset Formula
26731 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26740 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26741 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26744 \begin_layout Subsection
26748 \begin_layout Standard
26749 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26750 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26754 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26755 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26756 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26757 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26758 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26762 \begin_layout Subsection
26763 Exponents and Subscripts
26764 \begin_inset Index idx
26767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26774 \begin_inset Index idx
26777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26786 \begin_layout Standard
26787 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26790 arg "math-superscript"
26796 arg "math-subscript"
26799 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26801 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26804 , type in a formula
26807 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26817 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26823 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26827 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26839 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26848 , you have to use an extra
26852 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26853 For example, if you want
26854 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26860 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26866 Subscripts are similar: To get
26867 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26873 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26881 \begin_layout Subsection
26883 \begin_inset Index idx
26886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26895 \begin_layout Standard
26896 Create a fraction either with the command
26902 or by using the icon
26905 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26911 \begin_inset space ~
26917 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26918 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26919 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26924 To move back up, press
26929 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26930 \begin_inset Formula
26932 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26935 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26943 \begin_layout Subsection
26945 \begin_inset Index idx
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26957 \begin_layout Standard
26958 Roots can be created using the
26961 \begin_inset space ~
26969 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26975 arg "math-insert \\root"
26997 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27003 always produces a square root.
27006 \begin_layout Subsection
27007 Operators with Limits
27008 \begin_inset Index idx
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27018 \begin_inset Index idx
27021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27030 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27037 \begin_layout Standard
27039 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27043 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27046 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27047 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27048 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27049 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27050 The sum operator will automatically place its
27051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27058 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27060 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27064 \begin_inset Formula
27066 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27071 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27075 \begin_layout Standard
27076 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27078 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27079 behind the operator and using the menu
27081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27082 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27084 \begin_inset space ~
27088 \begin_inset space ~
27102 \begin_layout Standard
27103 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27112 \begin_inset Index idx
27115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 \begin_inset Formula
27124 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27129 which will place the
27130 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27142 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27143 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27149 \begin_layout Standard
27150 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27157 Have a look at section
27158 \begin_inset space ~
27162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27164 reference "subsec:Functions"
27168 for an explanation of function macros.
27171 \begin_layout Subsection
27173 \begin_inset Index idx
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27185 \begin_layout Standard
27186 Most math symbols can be found in the
27189 \begin_inset space ~
27194 under one of several categories; including
27211 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27215 \begin_layout Standard
27216 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27217 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27218 don't have to use the
27221 \begin_inset space ~
27226 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27228 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27231 \begin_layout Subsection
27233 \begin_inset Index idx
27236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27245 \begin_layout Standard
27246 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27252 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27258 \begin_inset space ~
27266 arg "math-insert \\space"
27270 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27271 For example, the sequence
27276 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27279 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27281 \begin_inset Graphics
27282 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27287 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27288 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27289 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27290 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27291 , because they are negative
27293 Here are two examples:
27296 \begin_layout Standard
27306 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27312 \begin_layout Standard
27322 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27328 \begin_layout Subsection
27330 \begin_inset Index idx
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27342 name "subsec:Functions"
27349 \begin_layout Standard
27353 \begin_inset space ~
27358 contains under the button
27361 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27364 a number of function macros, such as
27365 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27369 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27377 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27384 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27385 avoid confusions, because
27386 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27390 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27396 \begin_layout Standard
27397 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27399 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27403 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27411 are placed, as described in section
27412 \begin_inset space ~
27416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27418 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27425 \begin_layout Subsection
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27442 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27443 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27444 commands, for example, to enter
27445 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27448 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27449 Our example is entered by typing
27454 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27461 \begin_inset space ~
27465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27467 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27471 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27474 \begin_layout Standard
27475 \begin_inset Float table
27482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27483 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27488 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27492 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27502 \begin_inset Tabular
27503 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27504 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27506 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27507 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27591 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27645 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27699 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27807 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27915 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28023 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28068 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28089 \begin_layout Standard
28090 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28093 \begin_inset space ~
28101 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28104 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28108 \begin_layout Section
28109 Brackets and Delimiters
28110 \begin_inset Index idx
28113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 \begin_inset Index idx
28123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28132 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28139 \begin_layout Standard
28140 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28142 For some purposes, using just the keys
28147 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28148 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28149 toolbar delimiter icon
28152 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28156 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28157 \begin_inset Formula
28159 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28167 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28168 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28172 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28175 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28181 \begin_inset Formula
28183 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28191 \begin_layout Standard
28192 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28193 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28199 left side and right side.
28200 If you use the option
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28208 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28209 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28211 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28216 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28217 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28220 \begin_layout Standard
28221 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28222 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28223 is to go inside the brackets.
28224 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28229 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28230 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28231 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28235 arg "math-delim ( )"
28241 \begin_layout Section
28242 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28243 \begin_inset Index idx
28246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28253 \begin_inset Index idx
28256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28280 \begin_inset space ~
28288 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28292 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28293 Here is an example:
28294 \begin_inset Formula
28296 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28305 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28306 \begin_inset space ~
28310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28312 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28317 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28318 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28319 This alignment is set in the box
28324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28373 for every column as default.
28374 For example, the sequence
28375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28386 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28387 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28388 corresponds to the relevant column.
28389 The result will look like this:
28390 \begin_inset Formula
28393 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28394 column & has & has\,right\\
28395 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28404 \begin_layout Standard
28405 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28408 arg "newline-insert newline"
28411 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28412 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28414 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28417 or the math toolbar.
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28421 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28422 It can be created with the menu
28424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28425 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28427 \begin_inset space ~
28439 Here is an example:
28440 \begin_inset Formula
28454 \begin_layout Standard
28455 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28458 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28461 arg "newline-insert newline"
28465 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28470 arg "newline-insert newline"
28473 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28481 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28482 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28483 A new row is created by every further entry of
28486 arg "newline-insert newline"
28490 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28491 Here is an example:
28492 \begin_inset Formula
28494 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28495 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28500 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28501 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28502 \begin_inset Formula
28504 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28512 \begin_layout Standard
28513 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28520 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28521 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28524 reference "eq:asquared"
28529 The other types are described in section
28530 \begin_inset space ~
28534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28536 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28543 \begin_layout Section
28544 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28545 \begin_inset Index idx
28548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28549 Math ! Formula numbering
28555 \begin_inset Index idx
28558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28559 Math ! Referencing formulas
28565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28567 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28574 \begin_layout Standard
28575 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28578 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28580 \begin_inset space ~
28584 \begin_inset space ~
28592 arg "math-number-toggle"
28596 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28597 within parentheses.
28598 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28599 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28600 the document class.
28601 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28602 separated by a dot:
28603 \begin_inset Formula
28613 arg "math-number-toggle"
28616 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28617 You can only number displayed formulas.
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28621 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28624 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28626 \begin_inset space ~
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28638 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28641 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28642 \begin_inset Formula
28645 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28651 To number all lines use the shortcut
28654 arg "math-number-toggle"
28660 \begin_layout Standard
28661 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28664 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28665 A label is inserted with the menu
28667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28676 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28677 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28678 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28690 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28691 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28692 We inserted in the following example the label
28693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28700 in the second line:
28701 \begin_inset Formula
28703 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28704 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28709 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28710 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28711 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28715 \begin_inset space ~
28723 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28727 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28728 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28729 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28730 as the formula number:
28733 \begin_layout Standard
28734 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28737 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28744 \begin_layout Standard
28745 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28746 's cross-reference box are described in section
28747 \begin_inset space ~
28751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28758 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28766 \begin_layout Section
28767 User defined math macros
28768 \begin_inset Index idx
28771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 \begin_layout Standard
28782 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28783 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28784 Math macros are explained in section
28787 \begin_inset space ~
28799 \begin_layout Section
28803 \begin_layout Subsection
28805 \begin_inset Index idx
28808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28817 \begin_layout Standard
28818 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28819 To set a font in a formula, use the
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28830 arg "math-insert \\font"
28833 , or enter its command, listed in table
28834 \begin_inset space ~
28838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28840 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 \begin_inset Float table
28855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28856 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28861 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28865 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28875 \begin_inset Tabular
28876 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28877 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28878 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28879 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28911 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28938 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28965 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28998 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29025 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29047 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29053 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29054 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29067 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29083 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29117 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29139 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29145 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29153 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29166 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29182 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29216 \begin_layout Standard
29217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29225 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29228 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29230 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29234 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29254 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29255 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29260 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29261 space when you need a space in the box.
29262 Here is an example where
29263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29274 denotes the set of numbers:
29275 \begin_inset Formula
29277 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29285 \begin_layout Standard
29286 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29287 You can, for example, put a character in
29296 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29300 \begin_inset Newline newline
29303 So it is better not to use this feature.
29306 \begin_layout Standard
29307 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29308 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29312 \begin_inset Newline newline
29315 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29321 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29322 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29328 \begin_layout Standard
29335 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29338 \begin_layout Standard
29339 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29341 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29342 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29344 \begin_inset space ~
29352 \begin_layout Subsection
29354 \begin_inset Index idx
29357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29366 \begin_layout Standard
29367 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29369 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29373 \begin_inset space ~
29377 \begin_inset space ~
29385 \begin_inset space ~
29393 arg "math-insert \\font"
29397 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29398 in black instead of blue.
29399 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29400 Here is an example:
29401 \begin_inset Formula
29404 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29405 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29414 \begin_layout Subsection
29416 \begin_inset Index idx
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29429 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29430 automatically chosen in most situations.
29448 For most characters,
29456 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29457 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29462 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29463 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29464 thinks are appropriate.
29465 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29468 arg "math-insert \\style"
29472 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29473 For example, you can set
29474 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29477 , which is normally in
29486 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29490 The four styles are used in the following example:
29493 \begin_layout Standard
29494 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29498 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29502 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29506 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29512 \begin_layout Standard
29513 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29514 is set in a particular size with the menu
29516 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29518 \begin_inset space ~
29523 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29524 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29525 will be adjusted to correspond.
29526 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29541 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29547 \begin_layout Section
29548 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29550 \begin_inset Index idx
29553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29560 \begin_inset Index idx
29563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29572 \begin_layout Standard
29574 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29575 that are in common use.
29578 \begin_layout Subsection
29579 Enabling AMS-Support
29582 \begin_layout Standard
29583 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29585 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29601 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29602 selecting the checkbox
29605 \begin_inset space ~
29609 \begin_inset space ~
29613 \begin_inset space ~
29622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29626 \begin_inset Index idx
29629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29630 Document ! Settings
29638 \begin_inset space ~
29644 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29645 -errors in formulas,
29646 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29649 \begin_layout Subsection
29651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29653 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29658 \begin_inset Index idx
29661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29662 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29670 \begin_layout Standard
29671 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29672 provides a selection of different formula types.
29674 allows you to choose between
29695 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29703 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29706 \begin_layout Chapter
29710 \begin_layout Section
29712 \begin_inset Index idx
29715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29724 name "sec:Cross-References"
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29732 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29733 's strengths is cross-references.
29734 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29736 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29737 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29738 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29741 \begin_layout Enumerate
29745 \begin_layout Enumerate
29746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29748 name "enu:Second-item"
29755 \begin_layout Enumerate
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29765 or by pressing the toolbar button
29772 A gray label box like this:
29773 \begin_inset Graphics
29774 filename clipart/label.png
29778 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29780 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29815 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29816 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29832 \begin_layout Standard
29833 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29835 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29838 or the toolbar button
29841 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29845 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29846 \begin_inset Graphics
29847 filename clipart/reference.png
29851 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29853 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29866 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 As an alternative to
29873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29876 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29881 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29882 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29896 \begin_layout Standard
29897 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29898 \begin_inset space ~
29902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29904 reference "enu:Second-item"
29911 \begin_layout Standard
29912 It is recommended to use a protected space
29916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29917 described in section
29918 \begin_inset space ~
29922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29924 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29933 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29934 line breaks between them.
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29941 \begin_layout Description
29942 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29945 reference "fig:Two-images"
29952 \begin_layout Description
29953 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29954 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29966 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29973 \begin_layout Description
29974 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29975 \begin_inset space ~
29979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29980 LatexCommand pageref
29981 reference "fig:Two-images"
29988 \begin_layout Description
29990 \begin_inset space ~
29994 \begin_inset space ~
29997 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29999 LatexCommand vpageref
30000 reference "fig:Two-images"
30005 \begin_inset Newline newline
30008 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30009 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30010 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30011 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30012 it prints “on the next page”.
30013 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30016 \begin_layout Description
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30026 \begin_inset space ~
30029 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30032 reference "fig:Two-images"
30037 \begin_inset Newline newline
30040 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30046 ; otherwise it behaves like
30050 \begin_inset space ~
30054 \begin_inset space ~
30063 \begin_layout Description
30065 \begin_inset space ~
30068 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30069 \begin_inset Newline newline
30073 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30081 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30091 \begin_inset Index idx
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30096 packages ! prettyref
30102 \begin_inset Index idx
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 packages ! refstyle
30118 \begin_inset Newline newline
30121 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30122 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30125 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30138 is the default and preferred because
30142 supports only English documents.
30143 The format is specified by using the command
30147 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30156 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30157 preamble of the document.
30158 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30176 \begin_inset Newline newline
30183 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30188 \begin_inset Newline newline
30199 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30200 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30202 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30203 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30208 , you might do so as follows:
30209 \begin_inset Newline newline
30216 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30217 format{prop}{Proposition
30222 \begin_inset Newline newline
30225 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30226 the package documentation
30227 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30229 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30235 \begin_inset Newline newline
30246 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30253 \begin_layout Description
30255 \begin_inset space ~
30258 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30260 LatexCommand nameref
30261 reference "fig:Two-images"
30268 \begin_layout Description
30270 \begin_inset space ~
30273 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30274 label for the reference:
30275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30276 LatexCommand labelonly
30277 reference "fig:Two-images"
30282 \begin_inset Newline newline
30285 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30286 Code, if you want to issue a command
30287 that \SpecialChar LyX
30293 , then you may want to use the
30296 \begin_inset space ~
30301 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30311 This is the form needed for e.
30312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30316 \begin_inset space \space{}
30323 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30324 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30326 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30330 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30335 You can only use the style
30339 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30343 is always possible.
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30347 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30348 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30350 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30351 \begin_inset space ~
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30357 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30365 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30369 \begin_inset space ~
30373 \begin_inset space ~
30378 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30379 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30380 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30383 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30386 \begin_inset space ~
30391 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30392 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30395 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30399 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30400 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30401 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30408 You can change labels at any time.
30409 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30411 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30413 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30414 change them all manually
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30420 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30422 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30426 \begin_layout Standard
30427 References are described in detail in the section
30438 \begin_layout Section
30439 Table of Contents and other Listings
30440 \begin_inset Index idx
30443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30450 \begin_inset Index idx
30453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30454 Navigating ! Outline
30460 \begin_inset Index idx
30463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30479 \begin_layout Subsection
30481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30483 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30490 \begin_layout Standard
30491 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30494 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30496 \begin_inset space ~
30500 \begin_inset space ~
30506 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30508 If you click on it, the
30512 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30513 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30514 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30516 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30518 \begin_inset space ~
30523 that is described in section
30524 \begin_inset space ~
30528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30530 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30537 \begin_layout Standard
30538 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30539 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30541 \begin_inset space ~
30545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30547 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30551 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30553 \begin_inset space ~
30557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30559 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30563 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30565 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30568 \begin_layout Subsection
30569 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30572 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30579 \begin_layout Standard
30580 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30582 You can insert them via the
30584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30585 List/Contents/References
30588 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30591 \begin_layout Section
30592 URLs and Hyperlinks
30593 \begin_inset Index idx
30596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30603 \begin_inset Index idx
30606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30615 \begin_layout Subsection
30617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30626 \begin_layout Standard
30627 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30636 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30638 \begin_inset Flex URL
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30643 https://www.lyx.org
30651 \begin_layout Standard
30652 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30658 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30662 \begin_layout Standard
30663 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30680 \begin_layout Subsection
30682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30684 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30691 \begin_layout Standard
30692 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30697 or with the toolbar button
30704 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30713 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30714 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30717 name "LyX's homepage"
30718 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30723 , an Email address like this:
30724 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30726 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30727 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30733 , or a link to a file.
30738 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30747 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30760 to the link target.
30763 \begin_layout Standard
30764 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30765 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30766 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30767 the text style dialog.
30768 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30774 name "LyX's homepage"
30775 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30783 \begin_layout Standard
30784 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30788 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30791 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30795 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30797 \begin_inset Newline newline
30805 \begin_inset Newline newline
30812 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30813 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30817 \begin_layout Section
30819 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30821 \begin_inset Index idx
30824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30833 name "sec:Counters"
30840 \begin_layout Standard
30842 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30843 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30844 is its ability to manage counters.
30845 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30846 modify counters directly.
30847 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30849 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30855 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30856 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30857 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30858 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30859 to set the section counter to four.
30866 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30867 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30868 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30869 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30872 \begin_layout Standard
30874 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30875 There are five commands you can use:
30878 \begin_layout Enumerate
30880 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30881 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30884 \begin_layout Enumerate
30886 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30887 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30888 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30891 \begin_layout Enumerate
30893 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30894 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30897 \begin_layout Enumerate
30899 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30900 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30904 \begin_layout Enumerate
30906 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30907 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30910 \begin_layout Standard
30912 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30913 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30914 those that are available in the current document class.
30919 \begin_layout Section
30921 \begin_inset Index idx
30924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30933 name "sec:Appendices"
30940 \begin_layout Standard
30941 Appendices are created with the menu
30943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30945 \begin_inset space ~
30949 \begin_inset space ~
30955 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30956 as the appendix part of the book.
30957 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30962 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30963 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30964 and the subsection number.
30965 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30971 \begin_inset space ~
30975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30977 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30985 \begin_inset space ~
30989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30991 reference "subsec:Export"
30998 \begin_layout Section
31000 \begin_inset Index idx
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31012 name "sec:Bibliography"
31019 \begin_layout Standard
31020 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31022 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31023 \begin_inset space ~
31027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31029 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31036 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31041 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31042 \begin_inset space ~
31046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31048 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31053 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31054 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31055 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31059 using a bibliography database.
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31064 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31068 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31069 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31070 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31071 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31072 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31075 \begin_layout Subsection
31076 The Bibliography Environment
31077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31079 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31091 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31093 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31102 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31104 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31105 of ASCII characters only.
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31114 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31120 \begin_inset Newline newline
31124 \begin_inset Flex URL
31127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31129 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31139 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31149 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31150 \begin_inset Newline newline
31157 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31158 the number of the entry.
31163 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31172 \begin_layout Standard
31173 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31178 or the toolbar button
31181 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31185 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31186 containing the available citations.
31187 Select one or more keys from the list and
31197 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31198 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31204 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31205 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31217 \begin_layout Standard
31221 Companion Second Edition
31224 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31226 key "latexcompanion"
31234 \begin_layout Standard
31235 The \SpecialChar LyX
31236 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31248 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31255 \begin_inset Index idx
31258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31268 the label needs to be given the form
31269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31280 Author A and Author B(Year)
31281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31288 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31295 \begin_inset space ~
31300 in the document settings
31301 \begin_inset Index idx
31304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31305 Document ! Settings
31312 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31314 \begin_inset space ~
31320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31322 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31330 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31332 Once you have done that, the
31336 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31353 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31354 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31355 These two are madatory.
31356 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31359 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31361 ) and in abrreviated form (
31368 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31369 add the abbreviated form to
31373 and the full list to the optional
31381 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31382 If specified like this,
31384 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31385 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31395 is specified, toggling
31396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31403 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31404 full and abbreviated list
31408 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31409 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31410 the citation references.
31411 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31417 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31420 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31422 \begin_inset space ~
31430 arg "layout-paragraph"
31434 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31437 \begin_layout Subsection
31438 Bibliography databases
31439 \begin_inset Index idx
31442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31443 Bibliography ! Databases
31449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31451 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31467 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31468 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31473 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31475 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31476 your working field in a database.
31477 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31478 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31479 list for that document.
31480 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31484 \begin_layout Standard
31485 The database is a text file with the file extension
31486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31497 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31498 The format is explained in
31499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31506 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31510 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31516 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31517 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31518 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31520 \begin_inset Flex URL
31523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31525 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31535 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31536 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31537 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31539 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31541 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31542 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31543 Those are addressed by
31548 \begin_inset Index idx
31551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31553 packages ! biblatex
31559 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31560 (although it has been significantly
31561 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31571 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31572 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31573 might conversely fail to correctly
31574 handle databases that use specific
31583 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31587 \begin_layout Standard
31588 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31593 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31599 \begin_inset Index idx
31602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31603 Document ! Settings
31615 \begin_inset space ~
31620 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31629 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31631 \begin_inset Index idx
31634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31635 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31644 \begin_layout Standard
31645 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31649 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31651 \begin_inset space ~
31657 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31658 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31666 Add bibliography to TOC
31668 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31673 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31674 in the document or just the cited references.
31676 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31681 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31682 differ from the encoding of the document.
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31688 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31689 style file is a text file with the file extension
31690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31701 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31702 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31703 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31704 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31706 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31712 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31713 \begin_inset Newline newline
31717 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31719 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31729 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31734 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31738 \begin_layout Standard
31739 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31744 \begin_inset Index idx
31747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31748 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31754 \begin_inset Index idx
31757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31759 packages ! biblatex
31767 \begin_layout Standard
31768 Accessing a database via
31772 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31776 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31778 \begin_inset space ~
31784 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31785 you cannot select a
31790 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31794 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31797 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31798 As for the styles, note the following.
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31808 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31821 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31822 file (text file with the file extension
31823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31834 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31835 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31837 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31841 \begin_layout Standard
31846 styles are not set in the
31849 \begin_inset space ~
31854 dialog, but in the document settings.
31855 \begin_inset Index idx
31858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31859 Document ! Settings
31864 However, in the dialog in the
31868 field, which is only visible if you use
31872 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31873 example how its heading will appear).
31874 These options are described in detail in the
31879 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31889 \begin_layout Standard
31890 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31891 \begin_inset space ~
31895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31897 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31908 Bibliography Processors
31911 \begin_layout Standard
31912 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31913 uses a bibliography processor,
31914 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31915 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31916 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31918 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31919 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31925 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31926 You can do this on a general level in
31928 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31929 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31930 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31933 or for individual documents in
31935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31936 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31940 The following variants are available by default:
31943 \begin_layout Description
31944 biber a specific, modern processor
31945 \begin_inset Index idx
31948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31955 developed exclusively for
31959 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31965 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31970 makes use of; if you use the
31974 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31981 \begin_layout Description
31982 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31983 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31984 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31988 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31991 \begin_layout Description
31992 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31993 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31997 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32001 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32005 features are supported.
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 By default (with the
32015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32029 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32030 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32031 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32034 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32035 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32048 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32049 -based bibliography styles).
32050 This should suit most needs.
32053 \begin_layout Standard
32054 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32055 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32056 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32061 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32062 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32063 You can adjust it in
32065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32066 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32067 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32073 \begin_layout Standard
32074 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32075 can add below the selection.
32076 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32077 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32083 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32099 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32101 These are explained in detail in section
32103 Customizing Bibliographies
32107 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32112 Additional Features
32115 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
32119 \begin_layout Subsection
32121 \begin_inset Index idx
32124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32125 Bibliography ! Citation format
32131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32133 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32141 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32146 \begin_inset space \space{}
32149 numerical citation (as
32150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32157 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32165 ) or author-year citations (as
32166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32175 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32179 \begin_layout Standard
32180 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32184 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32188 \begin_inset Index idx
32191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32192 Document ! Settings
32197 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32203 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32204 labels, is there to use
32207 \begin_inset space ~
32218 \begin_inset space ~
32223 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32226 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32233 \begin_layout Standard
32234 With a bibliography database (see
32235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32237 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32244 ) one has in contrary to the
32248 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32249 These style formats are available:
32252 \begin_layout Description
32254 \begin_inset space ~
32257 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32258 -based approached without any additional packages
32259 (simple numeric citations).
32262 \begin_layout Description
32263 Biblatex loads the package
32268 \begin_inset Index idx
32271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 packages ! biblatex
32278 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32280 Biblatex citation style
32284 Biblatex bibliography style
32287 Options to the package
32291 can be entered in the
32298 \begin_layout Description
32300 \begin_inset space ~
32304 \begin_inset space ~
32307 mode) loads the package
32311 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32312 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32324 behavior very closely.
32329 this option has some additional styles.
32334 styles are also supported by this variant.
32337 \begin_layout Description
32339 \begin_inset space ~
32342 (BibTeX) loads the package
32347 \begin_inset Index idx
32350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32357 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32360 \begin_layout Description
32362 \begin_inset space ~
32365 (BibTeX) loads the package
32370 \begin_inset Index idx
32373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32380 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32383 \begin_layout Standard
32392 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32394 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32403 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32405 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32406 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32408 Biblatex citation style
32411 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32417 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32421 \begin_layout Standard
32422 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32423 are available in the
32428 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32429 a name prefix such as
32430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32445 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32450 \begin_inset space \space{}
32454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32465 \begin_layout Standard
32466 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32472 \begin_inset space \space{}
32475 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32481 \begin_inset space \space{}
32485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32497 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32501 \begin_inset space ~
32509 \begin_inset space ~
32515 Here is a simple example where the text
32516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32520 \begin_inset space ~
32524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32527 appears after the reference:
32530 \begin_layout Quote
32532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32535 key "latexcompanion"
32543 \begin_layout Standard
32544 All styles except for
32548 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32558 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32562 \begin_layout Standard
32563 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32564 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32565 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32570 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32571 multi-citation (so-called
32572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32575 qualified citation lists
32576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32582 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32587 dialog will display three columns in the field
32594 \begin_inset space ~
32602 \begin_inset space ~
32610 \begin_inset space ~
32616 If you double-click on an item's
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32627 \begin_inset space ~
32632 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32635 General text before
32641 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32644 \begin_layout Subsection
32646 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32649 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32653 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32657 \begin_layout Standard
32659 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32661 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32668 \begin_inset space ~
32672 \begin_inset space ~
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32679 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32682 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32685 \begin_layout Itemize
32687 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32688 If citation entries include any of the fields
32689 \begin_inset Flex Code
32692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32694 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32703 \begin_inset Flex Code
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32708 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32716 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32717 \begin_inset Flex Code
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32722 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32730 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32731 \begin_inset Flex Code
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32736 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32744 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32747 \begin_layout Itemize
32749 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32750 If citation entries include any of the fields
32751 \begin_inset Flex Code
32754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32756 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32764 (filled by JabRef) or
32765 \begin_inset Flex Code
32768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32770 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32778 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32779 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32780 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32783 \begin_layout Standard
32785 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32786 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32787 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32790 Search drive for cited files
32794 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32795 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32796 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32801 It uses the tokens supplied at
32805 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32806 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32807 arbitrary position).
32809 opens the first matching file it finds.
32810 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32811 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32812 the chance this works for you.
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32819 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32820 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32821 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32823 \begin_inset Flex Code
32826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32828 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32837 \begin_inset Flex Code
32840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32842 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32850 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32854 Cite format description
32861 \begin_layout Section
32863 \begin_inset Index idx
32866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32882 \begin_layout Standard
32883 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32892 or the toolbar button
32899 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32900 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32901 by \SpecialChar LyX
32902 as the index entry.
32905 \begin_layout Standard
32906 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32909 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32911 \begin_inset space ~
32917 A light blue box labeled
32918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32929 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32930 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32934 \begin_layout Standard
32935 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32936 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32937 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32938 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32940 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32942 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32950 \begin_layout Subsection
32951 Grouping Index Entries
32952 \begin_inset Index idx
32955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32964 \begin_layout Standard
32965 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32967 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32968 lists under the entry
32969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32977 First we create the entry
32978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32992 reference "subsec:Lists"
32997 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32998 \begin_inset space ~
33002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33004 reference "sec:Itemize"
33008 , we insert the command
33011 \begin_layout Standard
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33021 \begin_layout Standard
33027 \begin_layout Standard
33028 for the enumerated list in section
33029 \begin_inset space ~
33033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33035 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33042 \begin_layout Standard
33043 The exclamation mark
33044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33051 marks the grouping levels.
33052 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33053 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33054 If we don't have an index entry for
33055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33062 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33065 \begin_layout Subsection
33067 \begin_inset Index idx
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 Index ! Page ranges
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33080 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33082 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33083 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33084 an index entry in section
33085 \begin_inset space ~
33089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33091 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33098 \begin_layout Standard
33101 Paragraph environments|(
33104 \begin_layout Standard
33105 and another entry at the end of section
33106 \begin_inset space ~
33110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33112 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33119 \begin_layout Standard
33122 Paragraph environments|)
33125 \begin_layout Standard
33127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33150 respectively start and end the index range.
33151 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33152 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33153 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33154 An example is the index entry
33155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33158 Document ! Settings
33159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33165 \begin_layout Subsection
33167 \begin_inset Index idx
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 Index ! Cross referencing
33179 \begin_layout Standard
33180 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33181 We referred for example in the index entry
33182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33190 \begin_inset space ~
33194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33196 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33200 ) to the index entry
33201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33208 in the same section using the entry
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33214 GIF|see{Image formats}
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33218 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33220 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33221 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33224 \begin_layout Subsection
33226 \begin_inset Index idx
33229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33230 Index ! Entry order
33238 \begin_layout Standard
33239 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33240 follow the rules for the index order.
33241 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33247 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33255 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33264 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33265 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33290 \begin_inset Index idx
33293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 Dummy entries ! maïs
33300 \begin_inset Index idx
33303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33304 Dummy entries ! maître
33310 \begin_inset Index idx
33313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33314 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33319 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33320 maïs, maison, maître.
33321 To achieve this, we use the command
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33327 previous entry@current entry
33330 \begin_layout Standard
33331 In our case we want to have
33332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33347 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33350 \begin_layout Standard
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33358 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33360 See the next subsection for an example.
33363 \begin_layout Subsection
33365 \begin_inset Index idx
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33369 Index ! Entry layout
33377 \begin_layout Standard
33378 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33379 \begin_inset Index idx
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33385 This is an italic dummy entry
33390 You can also format the page number using the character
33391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33398 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33399 -command without a backslash.
33400 We can write for example
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33406 italic page number:|textit
33409 \begin_layout Standard
33410 to get the page number in italic.
33411 \begin_inset Index idx
33414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33420 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33421 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33445 Have a look at section
33446 \begin_inset space ~
33450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33452 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33456 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33469 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33473 to generate the index, see section
33474 \begin_inset space ~
33478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33480 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33489 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33494 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33495 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33498 key "latexcompanion"
33511 \begin_layout Standard
33512 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33514 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33515 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33516 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33517 If so, put the following in the preamble
33520 \begin_layout Standard
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33542 \begin_layout Standard
33543 in the index entry.
33544 \begin_inset Index idx
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33548 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33553 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33554 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33555 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33560 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33561 a bold font for all index entries.
33562 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33574 documentation for details,
33575 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33577 key "makeindex,xindy"
33585 \begin_layout Subsection
33587 \begin_inset Index idx
33590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33599 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 If the index generation program
33611 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33612 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33616 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33617 distribution, is used.
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33626 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33627 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33628 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33629 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33630 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33640 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33642 dialog, see section
33643 \begin_inset space ~
33647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33649 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33654 The available options are listed and explained in
33655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33657 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33663 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33667 \begin_layout Standard
33668 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33669 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33672 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33673 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33677 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33678 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33681 \begin_layout Subsection
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33686 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33687 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33695 next to the standard index.
33697 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33698 that add this feature.
33705 \begin_inset Index idx
33708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33710 packages ! splitidx
33715 package to generate multiple indexes.
33716 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33722 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33724 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33732 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33733 style, but it also includes
33734 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33735 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33743 \begin_layout Standard
33744 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33745 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33751 and select the option
33753 Use multiple Indexes
33760 already contains the standard index
33761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33769 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33770 also appear as a heading) to the
33774 input field and press the
33779 The new index now also appears in the list.
33780 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33781 label color to the new index.
33784 \begin_layout Standard
33785 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33789 List/Contents/References
33795 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33796 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33797 are additional features:
33800 \begin_layout Itemize
33801 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33802 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33805 \begin_layout Itemize
33806 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33807 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33812 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33813 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33814 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33815 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33818 \begin_layout Itemize
33823 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33824 code in the name of the index.
33827 \begin_layout Section
33828 Nomenclature/Glossary
33829 \begin_inset Index idx
33832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33839 \begin_inset Index idx
33842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33873 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33882 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33883 called nomenclature or glossary.
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33887 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33894 \begin_inset Index idx
33897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33905 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33907 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33914 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33920 and then use the menu
33922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33928 \begin_inset space ~
33933 or the toolbar button
33936 arg "nomencl-insert"
33941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33952 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33957 The first is the term or
33961 that you wish to define.
33966 of the term or symbol.
33969 \begin_layout Standard
33970 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33978 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33979 code for nomenclature entries the option
33983 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33991 \begin_layout Subsection
33992 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33993 \begin_inset Index idx
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33997 Nomenclature ! Layout
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34006 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34010 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34017 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34025 \begin_inset Newline newline
34033 \begin_inset Newline newline
34039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34046 character starts/ends the formula.
34047 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34048 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34060 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34071 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34072 syntax is given in section
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34079 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34086 \begin_layout Standard
34090 \begin_inset space ~
34095 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34097 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34102 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34109 in this document is:
34110 \begin_inset Newline newline
34115 dummy entry for the character
34120 \begin_inset Newline newline
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34142 font use the command
34171 \begin_layout Standard
34172 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34177 \begin_inset space \space{}
34181 \begin_inset Newline newline
34197 \begin_inset Newline newline
34200 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34201 This command will make the font of all symbols
34208 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 If the characters |
34218 \begin_inset space \space{}
34222 \begin_inset space \space{}
34226 \begin_inset space \space{}
34230 \begin_inset space \space{}
34234 \begin_inset space \space{}
34237 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34238 code they need to be escaped
34240 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34242 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34245 character in front of them.
34246 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34248 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34249 LatexCommand nomenclature
34250 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34251 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34257 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34259 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34260 LatexCommand nomenclature
34261 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34262 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34272 \begin_layout Subsection
34273 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34274 \begin_inset Index idx
34277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34278 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34288 -code of the symbol
34290 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34292 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34295 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34296 LatexCommand nomenclature
34298 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34306 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34310 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34311 LatexCommand nomenclature
34314 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34320 They will be sorted by
34321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34347 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34350 will be sorted before the
34354 since the character
34355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34362 is considered in sorting.
34365 \begin_layout Standard
34366 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34369 \begin_inset space ~
34374 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34375 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34377 For the example given, you can insert
34381 in this field for the
34382 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34389 will be located before
34390 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34412 \begin_layout Subsection
34413 Nomenclature Options
34414 \begin_inset Index idx
34417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34418 Nomenclature ! Options
34424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34426 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34433 \begin_layout Standard
34438 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34439 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34442 \begin_layout Description
34443 refeq Appends the phrase
34444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34459 to every nomenclature entry, where
34465 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34468 \begin_layout Description
34469 refpage Appends the phrase
34470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34485 to every nomenclature entry, where
34491 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34494 \begin_layout Description
34495 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34500 class options list in the
34502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34506 In this document the options
34513 \begin_layout Standard
34514 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34520 \begin_layout Standard
34521 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34522 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34527 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34530 \begin_layout Description
34540 \begin_layout Description
34543 nomrefpage Like the
34550 \begin_layout Description
34553 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34562 \begin_layout Description
34566 \begin_inset space ~
34572 \begin_inset space ~
34577 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34580 \begin_layout Standard
34582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34589 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34590 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34603 \begin_inset Newline newline
34609 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34613 \begin_inset space ~
34625 unskip, see equation
34628 \begin_inset Newline newline
34635 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34636 \begin_inset Newline newline
34642 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34646 \begin_inset space ~
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34664 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34667 \begin_inset space ~
34672 in the document settings under
34675 \begin_inset space ~
34683 \begin_layout Standard
34691 \begin_inset Newline newline
34695 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34711 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34713 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34714 \begin_inset Newline newline
34721 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34722 \begin_inset Newline newline
34726 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34730 \begin_inset space ~
34742 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34747 \begin_layout Subsection
34748 Printing the Nomenclature
34749 \begin_inset Index idx
34752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34753 Nomenclature ! Printing
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34762 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34765 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34781 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34782 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34783 You can choose between these settings:
34786 \begin_layout Description
34787 Default a space of 1
34788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34794 \begin_layout Description
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34803 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34806 \begin_layout Description
34807 Custom custom space
34810 \begin_layout Standard
34811 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34820 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34828 For example, in order to change the name to
34832 , add the following line to the preamble:
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34848 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34851 \begin_layout Standard
34852 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34853 \begin_inset Newline newline
34868 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34871 \begin_layout Subsection
34872 Nomenclature Program
34873 \begin_inset Index idx
34876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34877 Nomenclature ! Program
34883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34885 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34892 \begin_layout Standard
34898 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34899 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34901 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34906 by adding options, see section
34907 \begin_inset space ~
34911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34913 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34918 The available options are listed and explained in
34919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34921 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34929 \begin_layout Section
34931 \begin_inset Index idx
34934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34941 \begin_inset Index idx
34944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34945 Document ! Branches
34951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34953 name "sec:Branches"
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34962 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34963 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34964 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34967 \begin_layout Standard
34968 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34969 allows you to put text into branches.
34970 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34971 To create a branch, either select the menu
34973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34974 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34977 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34986 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34987 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34988 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34989 and whether the name of the branch should
34990 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34991 (see below for an example).
34992 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34993 to the name of the other) and to add
34994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35009 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35010 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35013 \begin_layout Standard
35014 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35015 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35020 where you can choose a branch.
35021 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35025 \begin_layout Standard
35026 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35027 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35031 \begin_inset Branch Question
35035 \begin_layout Standard
35040 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35049 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35053 \begin_layout Standard
35058 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35066 \begin_layout Standard
35073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35074 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35077 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35078 Consider for example a file
35079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35086 which has the above branches.
35088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35095 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35119 branch were inactive,
35120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35135 branch was active, likewise
35136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35151 branch was active, and
35152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35155 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35159 if both branches were active.
35160 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35161 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35167 \begin_layout Standard
35168 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
35174 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35175 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35205 branch is deactivated.
35211 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35217 \begin_layout Standard
35218 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35219 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35220 definitions for each branch.
35221 For example you can define for the question branch
35225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35226 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35227 -syntax, see section
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35234 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35246 \begin_layout Standard
35256 \begin_layout Standard
35266 \begin_layout Standard
35267 and for the answer branch
35270 \begin_layout Standard
35280 \begin_layout Standard
35290 \begin_layout Standard
35291 \begin_inset Branch Question
35295 \begin_layout Standard
35299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35332 \begin_layout Standard
35336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 Now it is possible to use the
35369 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35376 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35379 commands to obtain conditional output.
35380 Here is an example formula where only the
35387 \begin_inset Formula
35389 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35397 \begin_layout Standard
35398 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35406 \begin_layout Standard
35407 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35413 \begin_inset space \space{}
35416 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35418 For this advanced usage, see the
35424 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35429 \begin_layout Section
35431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35433 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35438 \begin_inset Index idx
35441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35454 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35457 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35459 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35465 \begin_inset Index idx
35468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35470 packages ! hyperref
35475 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35476 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35477 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35478 part of the document.
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 The header information in the dialog tab
35486 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35487 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35488 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35489 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35493 \begin_inset space ~
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35502 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35503 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35504 and author entries.
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35512 \begin_inset space ~
35516 \begin_inset space ~
35521 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35524 \begin_layout Standard
35525 You can specify in the dialog tab
35529 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35547 option allows long links to be split;
35550 \begin_inset space ~
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35571 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35574 \begin_inset space ~
35579 colors the different links.
35580 The default colors are:
35583 \begin_layout Labeling
35584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35589 for hyperlinks and URLs
35592 \begin_layout Labeling
35593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35601 \begin_layout Labeling
35602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35610 \begin_layout Standard
35611 but you can change these in the field
35616 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35619 \begin_layout Standard
35622 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35625 \begin_layout Standard
35630 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35631 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35632 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35635 \begin_layout Standard
35640 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35641 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35642 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35652 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35653 when opening the PDF.
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35658 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35659 \begin_inset space ~
35662 1 will only display the sections.
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35666 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35667 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35673 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35674 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35684 \begin_layout Section
35686 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35690 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35697 \begin_layout Subsection
35700 \begin_inset Index idx
35703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35713 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35720 \begin_layout Standard
35721 As \SpecialChar LyX
35722 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35723 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35724 commands and constructs,
35727 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35728 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35729 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35730 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35731 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35732 cannot support all packages and
35736 \begin_layout Standard
35737 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35738 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35739 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35743 Code box is created by the menu
35745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35752 or by the toolbar button
35765 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35773 \begin_layout Standard
35774 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35776 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35778 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35783 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35788 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35795 , you can write the command part
35801 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35802 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35806 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35807 Code box behind the word.
35808 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35809 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 \begin_inset Graphics
35815 filename clipart/ERT.png
35823 \begin_layout Standard
35827 \begin_layout Standard
35828 This is a line with a
35832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35856 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35864 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35865 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35866 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35867 know that the command is finished.
35875 \begin_layout Subsection
35876 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35878 \begin_inset Argument 1
35881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35882 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35889 \begin_inset Index idx
35892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35902 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35909 \begin_layout Standard
35910 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35911 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35912 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35913 uses in the background.
35914 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35915 is based on commands, you can
35916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35924 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35925 any time if you know the right commands.
35926 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35927 is the end of the day.
35928 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35929 all caption labels bold.
35930 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35932 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35936 \begin_layout Standard
35937 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35939 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35941 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35944 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35954 \begin_layout Standard
35955 As result you find that the package
35960 \begin_inset Index idx
35963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35971 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35976 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35993 usepackage[options]{package name}
35996 \begin_layout Standard
35997 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35998 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35999 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36000 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36003 \begin_layout Standard
36004 In your case the package name is
36009 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36014 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36015 So you add the command
36018 \begin_layout Standard
36023 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36026 \begin_layout Standard
36027 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36032 For more commands provided by the
36036 package, have a look at its documentation,
36037 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36052 \begin_layout Standard
36053 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36055 For example if you use a
36059 class, you don't need the package
36063 , you can instead write
36066 \begin_layout Standard
36071 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36076 \begin_layout Standard
36077 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36078 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36079 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36086 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36090 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36091 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36093 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36094 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36095 Code box as described in the previous
36099 \begin_layout Standard
36100 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36101 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36106 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36114 \begin_layout Standard
36115 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36121 \begin_layout Standard
36125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36135 \begin_inset Note Note
36138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36139 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36147 \begin_layout Left Header
36148 \begin_inset Argument 1
36151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36171 \begin_inset Note Note
36174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36175 defines the header line as described below
36183 \begin_layout Center Header
36184 \begin_inset Argument 1
36187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36196 \begin_layout Right Header
36197 \begin_inset Argument 1
36200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36221 \begin_layout Left Footer
36222 \begin_inset Argument 1
36225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36246 \begin_layout Center Footer
36247 \begin_inset Argument 1
36250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 \begin_inset Newline newline
36266 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36272 \begin_layout Right Footer
36273 \begin_inset Argument 1
36276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36298 \begin_layout Section
36299 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36302 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36307 \begin_inset Index idx
36310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 Document ! Header/Footer line
36317 \begin_inset Index idx
36320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36329 \begin_layout Standard
36330 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36351 \begin_inset space ~
36357 As a second step add in the menu
36359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36360 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36369 Custom Header/Footerlines
36372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36376 This module offers the following 6
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36383 \begin_layout Description
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36393 \begin_inset space ~
36397 \begin_inset space ~
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_layout Description
36409 \begin_inset space ~
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset space ~
36431 \begin_layout Standard
36432 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36433 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36436 \begin_layout Standard
36437 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36438 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36440 \begin_inset space ~
36444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36446 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36450 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36453 \begin_layout Standard
36454 \begin_inset Float figure
36461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36464 \begin_inset Tabular
36465 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36466 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36467 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36468 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36469 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36489 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36500 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36518 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36533 The normal text on the page goes here.
36534 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36536 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36537 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36551 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36562 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36580 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36627 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36632 name "fig:Page-layout"
36636 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36649 \begin_layout Standard
36650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36658 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36667 is set to “Default”.
36668 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36677 \begin_layout Subsection
36681 \begin_layout Standard
36682 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36683 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36684 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36685 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36687 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36689 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36694 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36700 \begin_inset space ~
36708 \begin_layout Description
36711 thepage prints the current page number
36714 \begin_layout Description
36717 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36720 \begin_layout Description
36723 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36726 \begin_layout Description
36729 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36730 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36737 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36740 because it usually goes in a left header.
36743 \begin_layout Description
36746 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36747 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36749 It is normally used in the right header.
36752 \begin_layout Subsection
36753 Default header/footer
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36757 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36758 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36759 footer has the page number.
36760 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36761 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36762 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36773 \begin_layout Subsection
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36779 Some pages are different.
36780 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36781 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36782 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36783 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36784 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36788 Header and footer decoration line
36791 \begin_layout Standard
36792 By default, you get a 0.4
36793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36796 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36797 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36809 in the following way:
36812 \begin_layout Standard
36819 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36822 \begin_layout Standard
36823 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36836 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36846 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36862 Several header/footer lines
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36867 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36868 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36870 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36896 \begin_layout Standard
36903 headheight}{height}
36906 \begin_layout Standard
36911 is a size in standard units (e.
36912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36916 \begin_inset space \space{}
36924 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36925 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36926 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36927 logfile with the menu
36929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36931 \begin_inset space ~
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36944 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36949 \begin_inset Index idx
36952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 packages ! fancyhdr
36960 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36961 for your header/footer.
36964 \begin_layout Subsection
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36969 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36970 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36971 This example consists of the following definition:
36974 \begin_layout Description
36976 \begin_inset space ~
36985 , empty optional argument
36988 \begin_layout Description
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36993 Header empty, empty optional argument
36996 \begin_layout Description
36998 \begin_inset space ~
37007 in the optional argument
37010 \begin_layout Description
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37021 in the optional argument
37024 \begin_layout Description
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37043 \begin_inset Newline newline
37047 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37054 in the optional argument
37057 \begin_layout Description
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37068 , empty optional argument
37071 \begin_layout Description
37074 headrulewidth set to 2
37075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37083 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37089 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37099 \begin_layout Standard
37100 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37114 pagestyle{headings}
37120 \begin_inset Note Note
37123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37124 switches back to page style with the default headings
37132 \begin_layout Section
37133 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37136 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37141 \begin_inset Index idx
37144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37151 \begin_inset Index idx
37154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37163 \begin_layout Standard
37165 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37166 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37167 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37170 \begin_layout Subsection
37174 \begin_layout Standard
37175 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37181 \begin_inset Index idx
37184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37186 packages ! preview-latex
37191 (on some systems named simply
37196 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37198 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37205 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37207 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37215 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37216 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37217 -package are automatically
37218 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37222 \begin_layout Subsection
37226 \begin_layout Standard
37227 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37228 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37230 activate the option
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37240 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37253 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37278 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37281 \begin_layout Standard
37282 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37287 \begin_inset space ~
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37303 \begin_layout Standard
37304 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37305 and when you finish
37309 \begin_layout Standard
37310 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37318 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37319 generated by activating the option
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37328 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37336 \begin_layout Subsection
37337 Selected document parts
37340 \begin_layout Standard
37341 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37342 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37343 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37344 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37346 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37352 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37353 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37354 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37358 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37365 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 is explained in section
37379 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37394 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37395 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37396 the final rotated boxes,
37397 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37398 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37400 Here is the result:
37403 \begin_layout Standard
37404 \begin_inset Preview
37406 \begin_layout Standard
37411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37415 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37421 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37431 height_special "totalheight"
37436 backgroundcolor "none"
37439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37464 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37470 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37493 Previewing works also for colors.
37494 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37513 is explained in section
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37533 \begin_layout Standard
37534 \begin_inset Preview
37536 \begin_layout Standard
37540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37559 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37564 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37583 \begin_layout Standard
37584 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37590 \begin_layout Standard
37591 If \SpecialChar LyX
37592 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37593 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37594 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37595 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37596 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37597 the \SpecialChar TeX
37599 If \SpecialChar LyX
37600 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37601 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37603 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37604 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37605 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37608 \begin_layout Subsection
37613 \begin_layout Standard
37614 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37615 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37618 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37625 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37627 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37629 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37630 's main window, then only this selection
37631 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37632 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37633 the source view window.
37638 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37639 ; but note that if you have
37640 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37642 not just the one which is open at the time.
37645 \begin_layout Section
37646 Advanced Find and Replace
37647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37649 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37654 \begin_inset Index idx
37657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37664 \begin_inset Index idx
37667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37676 \begin_layout Subsection
37680 \begin_layout Standard
37681 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37682 allows for searching of complex,
37683 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37685 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37686 The key-features are:
37689 \begin_layout Itemize
37690 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37691 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37692 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37696 \begin_layout Itemize
37697 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37698 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37699 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37700 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37703 \begin_layout Itemize
37704 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37705 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37706 outside of mathematics environments
37709 \begin_layout Itemize
37710 Search may be widened to a specific
37715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37722 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37723 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37730 \begin_layout Itemize
37731 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37732 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37737 \begin_inset space ~
37740 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37743 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37748 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37750 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37763 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37766 ) or the toolbar button
37769 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37775 Advanced Find and Replace
37780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37784 \begin_layout Standard
37790 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37794 \begin_inset space ~
37799 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37802 arg "paragraph-break"
37806 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37807 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37811 arg "paragraph-break"
37814 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37818 searches backwards.
37821 \begin_layout Standard
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37830 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37839 \begin_inset space ~
37844 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37848 Searching for mathematics
37851 \begin_layout Standard
37852 Mathematical formulas, such as
37853 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37856 or something more complex like
37857 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37860 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37865 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37866 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37867 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37868 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37880 This is done by switching to the
37884 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37889 This way, entering in the
37896 \begin_layout Itemize
37897 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37898 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37901 \begin_layout Itemize
37902 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37903 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37906 \begin_layout Itemize
37907 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37908 of it only within section headings.
37909 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37910 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37914 \begin_layout Itemize
37915 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37916 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37923 \begin_layout Standard
37924 The entries made in the
37928 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37931 \begin_inset space ~
37937 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37941 button or alternatively press
37944 arg "paragraph-break"
37951 while the cursor is in the
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37962 \begin_layout Standard
37963 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37965 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37969 \begin_layout Itemize
37970 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37971 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37979 with its typewriter version
37980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37994 \begin_layout Itemize
37995 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38001 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38013 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38020 (you may want to enable the
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38036 options and disable the
38044 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38052 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38053 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38057 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38060 , or occurrences of
38061 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38065 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38071 \begin_layout Subsection
38075 \begin_layout Standard
38076 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38081 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38085 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38095 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38101 This is done with the context menu
38103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38104 Insert Regular Expression
38106 while the cursor is in the
38111 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38112 expression matching rules
38116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38127 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38128 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38134 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38135 same text in the document.
38136 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38137 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38140 \begin_layout Enumerate
38141 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38146 editor the fraction
38147 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38151 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38154 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38155 fractions with the given denominator.
38158 \begin_layout Enumerate
38159 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
38171 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38176 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38177 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38178 Also, by inserting a
38179 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38182 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38183 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38186 \begin_layout Standard
38187 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38188 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38189 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38192 , and referring back to them through
38193 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38197 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38201 For example, try searching with the regexp
38202 \begin_inset Newline newline
38205 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38208 \begin_inset Newline newline
38211 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38215 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38227 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38228 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38229 sub-expressions is absolute.
38231 \begin_inset space ~
38235 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38238 always refers to the first occurrence of
38239 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38242 in all entered regexps.
38250 \begin_layout Section
38252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38254 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38259 \begin_inset Index idx
38262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 \begin_layout Standard
38273 has a built-in spell checker.
38276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38283 key or the toolbar button
38286 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38289 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38290 beginning of the currently selected text.
38291 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38292 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38293 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38294 scrolled so that it is visible.
38295 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38296 n, if any could be found.
38297 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38301 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38302 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38305 \begin_layout Standard
38306 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38313 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38314 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38316 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38317 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38328 arg "dialog-show character"
38331 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38333 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38336 \begin_layout Standard
38337 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38338 can be downloaded from here:
38339 \begin_inset Newline newline
38343 \begin_inset Flex URL
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38348 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38350 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38351 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38352 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38360 \begin_inset Newline newline
38364 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38366 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38367 You should download
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38373 files for each language
38374 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38379 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38382 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38383 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38387 \begin_inset space ~
38390 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38391 's installation subfolder
38399 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38401 \begin_inset Newline newline
38404 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38405 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38406 but in most cases these are
38422 is the language code.
38425 \begin_layout Subsection
38429 \begin_layout Standard
38432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38433 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38435 \begin_inset space ~
38438 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38441 you can set the following things:
38444 \begin_layout Description
38446 \begin_inset space ~
38449 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38450 should use for spell checking.
38451 Depending on your platform,
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38462 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38463 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38481 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38484 \begin_layout Description
38486 \begin_inset space ~
38489 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38490 will always use the given language
38491 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38494 \begin_layout Description
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38499 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38505 \begin_inset space \space{}
38509 This should normally not be needed.
38512 \begin_layout Description
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38521 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38533 \begin_layout Description
38535 \begin_inset space ~
38538 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38539 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38540 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38541 appear in a context menu.
38542 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38546 \begin_layout Description
38548 \begin_inset space ~
38552 \begin_inset space ~
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38559 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38563 \begin_layout Section
38565 \begin_inset Index idx
38568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38577 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38586 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38587 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38599 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38609 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38611 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38612 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38613 which are available for many languages.
38616 \begin_layout Standard
38617 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38618 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38622 \begin_layout Subsection
38623 Setting up the thesaurus
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38635 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38639 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38644 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38658 For instance, the US English files are named:
38661 \begin_layout Itemize
38665 \begin_layout Itemize
38669 \begin_layout Standard
38678 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38679 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38682 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38683 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38684 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38691 ) to the path where they are installed.
38695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38696 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38697 ies, typical locations are
38703 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38707 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38711 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38714 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38720 LibreOffice-<Version>
38727 On the Mac, the default location is
38729 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38730 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38731 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38732 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38733 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38734 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38742 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38743 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38744 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38748 \begin_layout Standard
38749 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38751 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
38753 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
38756 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
38757 \begin_inset Newline newline
38761 \begin_inset Flex URL
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38766 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
38768 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38769 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
38770 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
38780 \begin_layout Standard
38781 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38782 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38785 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38786 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38793 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38795 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38796 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38800 \begin_layout Standard
38801 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38803 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38806 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38812 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38815 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38816 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38824 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38825 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38826 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38828 \begin_inset space ~
38833 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38836 \begin_layout Subsection
38837 Using the thesaurus
38840 \begin_layout Standard
38841 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38843 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38846 or the toolbar button
38849 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38852 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38854 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38856 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38857 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38858 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38867 ), related terms (such as
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38879 ), compounds (such as
38882 \begin_inset space ~
38891 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38900 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38903 \begin_layout Standard
38904 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38905 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38909 \begin_layout Standard
38910 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38911 the dictionary, such as the above
38915 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38920 \begin_inset space \space{}
38923 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38924 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38925 For example, looking up the word form
38929 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38934 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38939 \begin_inset space \space{}
38950 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38951 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38952 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38955 \begin_layout Section
38957 \begin_inset Index idx
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38967 \begin_inset Index idx
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38971 Document ! Change Tracking
38977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38979 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38986 \begin_layout Standard
38987 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38988 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38989 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38990 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38994 \begin_inset space ~
38997 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39007 \begin_layout Standard
39008 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39022 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39023 You can change the color in
39025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39026 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39037 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39043 \begin_inset Index idx
39046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39047 Color ! Change tracking
39052 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39053 's status bar when the
39054 cursor is in changed text.
39055 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39058 arg "changes-merge"
39064 \begin_layout Standard
39065 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39067 \begin_inset Index idx
39070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39079 \begin_layout Standard
39080 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39087 \begin_inset Graphics
39088 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39096 \begin_layout Standard
39097 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39103 \begin_layout Standard
39104 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39107 \begin_layout Standard
39108 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39114 \begin_layout Standard
39115 \begin_inset Tabular
39116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39117 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39118 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39119 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 arg "changes-track"
39137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39148 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39168 arg "changes-output"
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39187 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39197 \begin_inset space ~
39206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Jumps to the next change
39233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 arg "change-accept"
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39258 \begin_inset space ~
39261 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39281 arg "change-reject"
39289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39297 \begin_inset space ~
39300 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39302 \begin_inset space ~
39311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 arg "changes-merge"
39328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39336 \begin_inset space ~
39339 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39341 \begin_inset space ~
39350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 arg "all-changes-accept"
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39375 \begin_inset space ~
39378 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39380 \begin_inset space ~
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 arg "all-changes-reject"
39410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39421 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39427 \begin_inset space ~
39436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39460 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39494 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39496 \begin_inset space ~
39512 \begin_layout Standard
39513 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39519 \begin_layout Standard
39520 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39540 \begin_layout Standard
39541 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39542 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39543 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39544 the next change after the current cursor position.
39545 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39546 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39547 step to the next change.
39548 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39551 \begin_layout Standard
39552 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39553 to describe a change.
39556 \begin_layout Standard
39558 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39559 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39565 \begin_inset Index idx
39568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39576 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39578 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39585 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39591 \begin_layout Section
39592 Comparison of Documents
39593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39595 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39600 \begin_inset Index idx
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39604 Comparison of documents
39612 \begin_layout Standard
39613 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39616 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39620 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39621 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39623 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39625 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39633 \begin_inset space ~
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset space ~
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39671 enables the change tracking option
39674 \begin_inset space ~
39678 \begin_inset space ~
39682 \begin_inset space ~
39687 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39690 \begin_layout Section
39691 International Support
39692 \begin_inset Index idx
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39696 International support
39704 \begin_layout Standard
39705 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39706 with any language you want.
39707 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39708 up \SpecialChar LyX
39710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39712 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39720 \begin_layout Standard
39721 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39722 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39723 \begin_inset space ~
39727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39729 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39736 \begin_layout Subsection
39738 \begin_inset Index idx
39741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39748 \begin_inset Index idx
39751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39752 Document ! Settings
39758 \begin_inset Index idx
39761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39762 Document ! Language
39770 \begin_layout Standard
39773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39774 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39777 dialog lets you set
39779 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39784 \begin_layout Standard
39789 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39794 \begin_inset space ~
39799 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39800 For details about the different encoding options see section
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39807 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39814 \begin_layout Subsection
39815 Keyboard mapping configuration
39816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39818 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39826 If you have for example a U.
39827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39830 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39831 can use an alternate keymap.
39832 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39837 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39838 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39839 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39842 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39849 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39854 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39855 which one you want to use.
39858 \begin_layout Standard
39859 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39860 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39861 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39865 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39866 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39867 one to support the characters you want.
39868 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39875 \begin_layout Chapter
39878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39880 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39887 \begin_layout Standard
39888 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39889 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39890 topic inside the user's guide.
39893 \begin_layout Section
39895 \begin_inset Index idx
39898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39907 \begin_layout Standard
39912 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39915 \begin_layout Subsection
39919 \begin_layout Standard
39920 Creates a new document.
39923 \begin_layout Subsection
39927 \begin_layout Standard
39928 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39929 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39930 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39932 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39933 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39939 \begin_layout Subsection
39943 \begin_layout Standard
39947 \begin_layout Subsection
39951 \begin_layout Standard
39952 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39953 Click there on a file to open it.
39956 \begin_layout Subsection
39958 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39964 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39965 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39969 \begin_layout Subsection
39973 \begin_layout Standard
39974 Closes the current document.
39977 \begin_layout Subsection
39981 \begin_layout Standard
39982 Closes all opened documents.
39985 \begin_layout Subsection
39989 \begin_layout Standard
39990 Saves the actual document.
39993 \begin_layout Subsection
39997 \begin_layout Standard
39998 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39999 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40003 \begin_layout Subsection
40005 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40009 \begin_layout Standard
40011 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40012 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40018 \begin_layout Subsection
40022 \begin_layout Standard
40023 Saves all opened documents.
40026 \begin_layout Subsection
40030 \begin_layout Standard
40031 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40034 \begin_layout Subsection
40038 \begin_layout Standard
40039 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40040 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40041 It is described in the section
40043 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40048 Additional Features
40053 \begin_layout Subsection
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40058 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40059 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40061 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40062 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40066 \begin_layout Standard
40067 When using the menu entry
40070 \begin_inset space ~
40075 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40087 \begin_inset space ~
40092 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40093 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40096 \begin_layout Subsection
40098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40100 name "subsec:Export"
40107 \begin_layout Standard
40108 You can export your document to various file formats.
40109 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40111 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40112 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40113 during its configuration.
40116 \begin_layout Standard
40117 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40125 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40132 \begin_layout Description
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40141 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40146 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40147 \begin_inset Newline newline
40150 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40151 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40155 \begin_layout Description
40156 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
40162 \begin_layout Description
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40167 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
40173 \begin_layout Description
40174 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40175 's native DVI-format.
40176 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
40177 files paths or file names in your document.
40179 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40186 \begin_layout Description
40187 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
40188 in files paths or file names
40191 \begin_layout Description
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40200 ) DVI-format using the program
40202 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40205 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40217 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40225 \begin_layout Description
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40230 (cropped) the same as
40234 but with cropped page margins.
40237 \begin_layout Description
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40242 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40246 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40251 \begin_layout Description
40255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40263 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40271 \begin_layout Description
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40277 \begin_inset space ~
40280 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40284 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40292 \begin_layout Description
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40305 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40306 source that is compilable with the program
40308 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40312 \begin_layout Description
40316 \begin_inset space ~
40321 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40322 source, additionally all images used in the document
40323 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40327 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40330 \begin_layout Description
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40339 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40340 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40341 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40349 \begin_layout Description
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40362 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40363 source that is compilable with the program
40369 \begin_layout Description
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40382 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40383 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40389 \begin_layout Description
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40394 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40395 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40401 \begin_inset space \space{}
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40425 represent the version number)
40428 \begin_layout Description
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40437 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40438 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40439 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40443 \begin_layout Description
40444 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40445 's internal XHTML engine
40448 \begin_layout Description
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40465 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40470 For the conversion the program
40479 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40482 \begin_layout Description
40483 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40488 \begin_layout Description
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40493 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40495 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40498 For the conversion the program
40507 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40510 \begin_layout Description
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40515 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40516 For the conversion the program
40525 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40528 \begin_layout Description
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40533 (cropped) the same as
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40541 but with cropped page margins
40544 \begin_layout Description
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40553 PDF-format using the program
40557 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40560 \begin_layout Description
40564 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40581 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40586 \begin_inset space \space{}
40589 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40593 \begin_layout Description
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40602 PDF-format using the program
40604 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40607 , produces PDF-files directly
40610 \begin_layout Description
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40619 PDF-format using the program
40623 , produces PDF-files directly
40626 \begin_layout Description
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40635 PDF-format using the program
40639 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40642 \begin_layout Description
40646 \begin_inset space ~
40651 PDF-format using the program
40656 , produces PDF-files directly
40659 \begin_layout Description
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_layout Description
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40684 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40685 and then exported as text using the program
40690 \begin_layout Description
40695 PostScript format using the program
40703 options see section
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40710 reference "subsec:General-output"
40717 \begin_layout Description
40718 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40719 source and also code in the statistical programming
40733 it is possible to use
40737 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40741 \begin_layout Standard
40742 If one of the menu entries
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40758 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40760 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40768 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40773 \begin_inset Index idx
40776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40777 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40786 \begin_layout Subsection
40790 \begin_layout Standard
40791 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40792 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40801 reference "sec:Paths"
40806 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40815 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40816 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40817 's preferences as described in section
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40824 reference "subsec:Converters"
40831 \begin_layout Subsection
40832 New and Close Window
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40836 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40840 \begin_layout Subsection
40844 \begin_layout Standard
40845 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40848 \begin_layout Section
40850 \begin_inset Index idx
40853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40862 \begin_layout Subsection
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40867 Described in section
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40874 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40881 \begin_layout Subsection
40882 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40885 \begin_layout Standard
40886 Described in section
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40893 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40900 \begin_layout Subsection
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40905 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40906 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40909 \begin_layout Subsection
40913 \begin_layout Standard
40914 Selects the whole document.
40917 \begin_layout Subsection
40918 Find & Replace (Quick)
40921 \begin_layout Standard
40922 Described in section
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40929 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40936 \begin_layout Subsection
40937 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40940 \begin_layout Standard
40941 Described in section
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40948 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40955 \begin_layout Subsection
40956 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40959 \begin_layout Standard
40960 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40964 \begin_layout Subsection
40966 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40970 \begin_layout Standard
40972 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40973 Described in section
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40980 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40989 \begin_layout Subsection
40991 \begin_inset Index idx
40994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40995 Paragraph ! Settings
41003 \begin_layout Standard
41004 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41005 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41009 \begin_layout Standard
41010 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41011 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41030 \begin_layout Subsection
41032 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41036 \begin_layout Standard
41038 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41039 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41044 \begin_layout Enumerate
41046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41047 Customize text properties by means of the
41053 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41056 ; this is described in section
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41063 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41070 \begin_layout Enumerate
41072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41073 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41075 Apply last settings
41078 \begin_layout Enumerate
41080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41081 Change the casing of selected text (
41096 \begin_layout Subsection
41098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41102 \begin_layout Standard
41104 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41105 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
41106 text styles (in the case of this document:
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41134 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41143 \begin_layout Subsection
41144 Table and Rows & Columns
41147 \begin_layout Standard
41148 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41149 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41150 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41153 \begin_layout Subsection
41157 \begin_layout Standard
41158 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41159 It will dissolve this inset.
41160 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
41164 \begin_layout Subsection
41168 \begin_layout Standard
41169 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41170 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41173 \begin_layout Subsection
41174 Increase/Decrease List Depth
41177 \begin_layout Standard
41178 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
41180 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41187 reference "sec:Nesting"
41192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41194 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41201 \begin_layout Section
41203 \begin_inset Index idx
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41215 \begin_layout Standard
41216 At the bottom of the
41220 menu the opened documents are listed.
41223 \begin_layout Subsection
41224 Open/Close all Insets
41227 \begin_layout Standard
41228 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41231 \begin_layout Subsection
41232 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41235 \begin_layout Standard
41236 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41239 \begin_layout Standard
41240 Math macros are described in the
41247 \begin_layout Subsection
41251 \begin_layout Standard
41252 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41259 reference "sec:Navigating"
41264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41266 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41273 \begin_layout Subsection
41277 \begin_layout Standard
41278 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41286 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41293 \begin_layout Subsection
41297 \begin_layout Standard
41298 Opens a window showing console messages.
41299 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41304 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41305 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41306 is processing the document.
41309 \begin_layout Subsection
41311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41313 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41318 \begin_inset Index idx
41321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41330 \begin_layout Standard
41331 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41333 All toolbars and the
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41354 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41356 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
41358 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
41362 \begin_layout Standard
41364 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41403 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41406 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
41410 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
41412 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
41426 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
41427 denoted in the menu with the suffix
41436 \begin_layout Standard
41441 state the toolbar is permanently shown
41442 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
41447 state it is never shown
41453 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41454 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41455 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41456 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41457 is inside a formula or table respectively
41458 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
41459 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
41464 \begin_layout Standard
41466 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41473 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41480 \begin_layout Subsection
41484 \begin_layout Standard
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41513 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41514 's main window vertically while
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset space ~
41529 \begin_inset space ~
41533 \begin_inset space ~
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41542 will split it horizontally.
41543 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41544 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41545 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41546 three or more documents at the same time.
41547 To close a split view, use the menu
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41562 \begin_layout Subsection
41566 \begin_layout Standard
41567 Closes a split view.
41570 \begin_layout Subsection
41574 \begin_layout Standard
41575 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41576 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41577 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41578 's main window fullscreen.
41579 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41580 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41583 \begin_layout Section
41585 \begin_inset Index idx
41588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41597 \begin_layout Subsection
41601 \begin_layout Standard
41602 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41603 \begin_inset space ~
41607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41609 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41620 \begin_layout Subsection
41622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41624 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41631 \begin_layout Standard
41632 Here you can insert the following characters:
41635 \begin_layout Description
41640 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41643 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41644 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41645 -packages you have installed.
41646 You can get a complete display by checking
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41655 \begin_inset Newline newline
41659 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41667 Not all characters will be visible in the
41671 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41672 dialog (see section
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41679 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41683 ) can display every character.
41691 \begin_layout Description
41692 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41696 \begin_layout Description
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41702 \begin_inset space ~
41705 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41712 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41719 \begin_layout Description
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41724 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41728 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41734 \begin_layout Description
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41739 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41743 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41749 \begin_layout Description
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41754 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41758 \begin_layout Description
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41763 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41767 \begin_layout Description
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41773 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41774 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41780 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41785 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41791 \begin_inset space \space{}
41794 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41795 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41804 To insert a fraction use the command
41809 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41813 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41822 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41829 \begin_layout Description
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41834 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41838 \begin_layout Description
41840 \begin_inset space ~
41844 \begin_inset Index idx
41847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 \begin_inset Index idx
41857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41863 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41864 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41866 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41872 \begin_inset Index idx
41875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41883 \begin_inset Newline newline
41886 More information about this feature can be found in the
41892 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41898 \begin_layout Description
41899 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41901 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41902 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41906 \begin_layout Subsection
41910 \begin_layout Standard
41911 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41914 \begin_layout Description
41915 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41916 \begin_inset script superscript
41918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41927 \begin_layout Description
41928 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41929 \begin_inset script subscript
41931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41940 \begin_layout Description
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41945 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41946 \begin_inset space ~
41950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41952 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41959 \begin_layout Description
41961 \begin_inset space ~
41964 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41971 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41978 \begin_layout Description
41980 \begin_inset space ~
41983 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41990 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41997 \begin_layout Description
41999 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42004 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42010 \begin_inset space \space{}
42013 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42014 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42023 To insert a fraction use the command
42028 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42032 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42041 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42050 \begin_layout Description
42052 \begin_inset space ~
42055 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42062 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42069 \begin_layout Description
42071 \begin_inset space ~
42074 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42075 \begin_inset space ~
42079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42081 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42088 \begin_layout Description
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42093 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42100 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42107 \begin_layout Description
42108 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42115 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42122 \begin_layout Description
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42127 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42134 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42141 \begin_layout Description
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42146 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42153 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42160 \begin_layout Description
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42166 \begin_inset space ~
42169 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42178 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42185 for a usage example.
42188 \begin_layout Description
42190 \begin_inset space ~
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42197 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42204 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42211 \begin_layout Description
42213 \begin_inset space ~
42216 Break Inserts a forced line break that
42217 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
42220 justifies the remaining text as described in section
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42227 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42234 \begin_layout Description
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42239 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42246 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42253 \begin_layout Description
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42258 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42259 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42267 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42272 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
42276 \begin_layout Description
42278 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42280 \begin_inset space ~
42284 \begin_inset space ~
42287 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42288 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42296 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42305 \begin_layout Description
42307 \begin_inset space ~
42310 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42311 \begin_inset space ~
42315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42317 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42324 \begin_layout Description
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42330 \begin_inset space ~
42333 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42334 \begin_inset space ~
42338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42340 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42347 \begin_layout Subsection
42349 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42353 \begin_layout Standard
42355 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42356 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42357 The submenu allows you to insert
42360 \begin_layout Description
42362 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42367 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42370 \begin_layout Description
42372 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42378 \begin_inset space ~
42381 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42385 \begin_layout Description
42387 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42389 \begin_inset space ~
42392 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42395 \begin_layout Description
42397 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42399 \begin_inset space ~
42402 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42405 \begin_layout Description
42407 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42409 \begin_inset space ~
42413 \begin_inset space ~
42416 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42420 \begin_layout Description
42422 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42427 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42430 \begin_layout Description
42432 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42438 \begin_inset space ~
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42445 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42448 \begin_layout Description
42450 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42452 \begin_inset space ~
42455 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42457 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42458 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42464 \begin_layout Description
42466 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42468 \begin_inset space ~
42471 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42474 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42480 \begin_layout Description
42482 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42483 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42484 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42485 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42488 \begin_layout Subsection
42491 List/Contents/References
42494 \begin_layout Standard
42495 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42520 are described in section
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42527 reference "sec:toc"
42536 is described in section
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42543 reference "sec:Index"
42551 is described in section
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42558 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42564 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42567 is described in section
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42574 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42581 \begin_layout Subsection
42585 \begin_layout Standard
42586 To insert floats, as described in section
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42593 reference "sec:Floats"
42597 and in detail the chapter
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42612 \begin_layout Subsection
42616 \begin_layout Standard
42617 To insert notes, described in section
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42624 reference "sec:Notes"
42631 \begin_layout Subsection
42635 \begin_layout Standard
42636 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42638 Branches are described in section
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42645 reference "sec:Branches"
42652 \begin_layout Subsection
42656 \begin_layout Standard
42657 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42658 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42660 An example is the document class
42661 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42671 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42680 with three custom insets.
42683 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42687 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42693 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42696 \begin_layout Subsection
42698 \begin_inset Index idx
42701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42711 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42713 For more information see chapter
42715 External Document Parts
42718 \begin_inset space ~
42724 \begin_layout Subsection
42726 \begin_inset Index idx
42729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42738 \begin_layout Standard
42739 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42740 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42747 \begin_inset space ~
42755 \begin_layout Subsection
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42764 dialog as described in section
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42771 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42778 \begin_layout Subsection
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42787 as described in section
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42794 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42801 \begin_layout Subsection
42805 \begin_layout Standard
42810 as described in section
42811 \begin_inset space ~
42815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42817 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42824 \begin_layout Subsection
42826 \begin_inset Index idx
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42836 \begin_inset Index idx
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42840 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42848 \begin_layout Standard
42849 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42850 Floats are described in section
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42857 reference "sec:Floats"
42861 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42864 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42872 \begin_inset space ~
42880 \begin_layout Subsection
42884 \begin_layout Standard
42885 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42892 reference "sec:Index"
42899 \begin_layout Subsection
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42904 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42905 \begin_inset space ~
42909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42911 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42918 \begin_layout Subsection
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42924 Tables are described in section
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42931 reference "sec:Tables"
42935 and in detail in the chapter
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42950 \begin_layout Subsection
42954 \begin_layout Standard
42960 Graphics are described in section
42961 \begin_inset space ~
42965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42967 reference "sec:Graphics"
42974 \begin_layout Subsection
42978 \begin_layout Standard
42979 Inserts a URL as described in section
42980 \begin_inset space ~
42984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42986 reference "subsec:URLs"
42993 \begin_layout Subsection
42997 \begin_layout Standard
42998 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42999 \begin_inset space ~
43003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43005 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43012 \begin_layout Subsection
43016 \begin_layout Standard
43017 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43018 \begin_inset space ~
43022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43024 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43031 \begin_layout Subsection
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43036 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43043 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43050 \begin_layout Subsection
43053 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43057 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43058 environments of the same type.
43060 \begin_inset space ~
43064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43066 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43070 for an explanation.
43073 \begin_layout Subsection
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43078 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43079 title or caption of a float.
43080 Inserts a short title as described in section
43081 \begin_inset space ~
43085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43087 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43094 \begin_layout Subsection
43099 \begin_layout Standard
43100 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43101 Code box as described in section
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43108 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43115 \begin_layout Subsection
43117 \begin_inset Index idx
43120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 \begin_layout Standard
43130 Inserts a program listings box.
43131 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43133 Program Code Listings
43138 \begin_inset space ~
43146 \begin_layout Subsection
43148 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43152 \begin_layout Standard
43154 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43155 Inserts the actual date.
43156 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
43163 \begin_layout Subsection
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43168 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43169 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43175 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43182 \begin_layout Section
43184 \begin_inset Index idx
43187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 \begin_layout Standard
43197 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
43198 \begin_inset space ~
43201 of the current document.
43202 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43205 \begin_layout Subsection
43209 \begin_layout Standard
43210 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43211 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43212 to jump, for example, between section
43213 \begin_inset space ~
43217 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43221 2.5 and use the submenu
43224 \begin_inset space ~
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43241 \begin_inset space ~
43245 \begin_inset space ~
43251 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43255 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43261 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43264 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43269 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
43270 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43276 \begin_inset space ~
43281 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43289 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43292 \begin_layout Subsection
43293 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43297 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43301 \begin_layout Subsection
43305 \begin_layout Standard
43306 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43307 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43308 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43316 \begin_inset space ~
43324 \begin_layout Subsection
43328 \begin_layout Standard
43329 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43332 The \SpecialChar LyX
43333 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43343 \begin_inset space ~
43348 manual for a detailed description.
43351 \begin_layout Section
43353 \begin_inset Index idx
43356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43365 \begin_layout Subsection
43369 \begin_layout Standard
43370 Change Tracking is described in section
43371 \begin_inset space ~
43375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43377 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43384 \begin_layout Subsection
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43393 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43394 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43395 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43397 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43398 to the clipboard or update the view.
43399 \begin_inset Newline newline
43402 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43406 \begin_layout Standard
43409 Open Containing Directory
43411 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43412 's temporary folder for the document.
43413 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43414 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43415 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43416 For example some journals require to send the
43420 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43424 \begin_layout Subsection
43425 Start Appendix Here
43428 \begin_layout Standard
43429 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43430 as described in section
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43437 reference "sec:Appendices"
43444 \begin_layout Subsection
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43452 \begin_layout Standard
43453 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43454 default output format for the document (menu
43456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43457 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43458 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43460 \begin_inset space ~
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43476 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43480 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43484 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43486 \begin_inset space ~
43489 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43494 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43500 \begin_inset space ~
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43512 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43516 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43517 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43519 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43520 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43525 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43530 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43540 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43545 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43546 when it is first configured.
43547 The default output format is
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43558 \begin_layout Subsection
43559 View (Other Formats)
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43563 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43564 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43565 actual document with an external program.
43566 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43567 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43568 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43570 All possible formats are listed in section
43571 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43577 reference "subsec:Export"
43582 You should at least see the menu entry
43587 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43589 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43597 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43602 \begin_inset Index idx
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43606 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43616 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43617 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43619 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43620 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43622 \begin_inset space ~
43625 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43630 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43640 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43645 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43646 when it is first configured.
43649 \begin_layout Subsection
43651 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43658 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43659 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43662 \begin_layout Subsection
43663 Update (Other Formats)
43666 \begin_layout Standard
43667 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43668 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43671 \begin_layout Subsection
43672 View Master Document
43675 \begin_layout Standard
43676 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43697 manual for more information on this topic).
43698 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43699 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43712 generates the output of the whole book, while
43716 will just output the chapter alone.
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43721 in the document settings (menu
43723 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43724 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43725 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43743 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43747 ) or in the preferences (menu
43749 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43750 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43755 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43760 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43778 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43785 \begin_layout Subsection
43786 Update Master Document
43789 \begin_layout Standard
43790 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43811 manual for more information on this topic).
43812 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43813 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43816 \begin_layout Standard
43817 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43818 in the document settings (menu
43820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43821 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43822 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43828 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43840 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43844 ) or in the preferences (menu
43846 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43847 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43852 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43857 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset space ~
43873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43875 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43882 \begin_layout Subsection
43884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43886 name "subsec:Compressed"
43893 \begin_layout Standard
43894 Un/compresses the current document.
43895 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43896 compression (see the
43898 Additional Features
43900 manual for details).
43903 \begin_layout Subsection
43907 \begin_layout Standard
43908 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43911 \begin_layout Subsection
43915 \begin_layout Standard
43916 The document settings are described in appendix
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43923 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43930 \begin_layout Section
43932 \begin_inset Index idx
43935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43944 \begin_layout Subsection
43948 \begin_layout Standard
43949 Spell checking is explained in section
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43956 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43963 \begin_layout Subsection
43967 \begin_layout Standard
43968 The thesaurus is described in section
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43975 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43982 \begin_layout Subsection
43984 \begin_inset Index idx
43987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43994 \begin_inset Index idx
43997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44006 \begin_layout Standard
44007 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44008 the highlighted document part.
44011 \begin_layout Subsection
44017 \begin_inset Index idx
44020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44021 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44030 \begin_layout Standard
44031 Generates with the help of the program
44033 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44036 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44037 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44038 This feature is not available on Windows.
44041 \begin_layout Subsection
44047 \begin_inset Index idx
44050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44060 \begin_layout Standard
44061 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44071 to see the full filename paths.
44074 \begin_layout Subsection
44076 \begin_inset Index idx
44079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44089 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44090 files as described in section
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44097 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44104 \begin_layout Subsection
44106 \begin_inset Index idx
44109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44122 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44140 \begin_inset Index idx
44143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44144 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44153 \begin_layout Standard
44154 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44155 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
44156 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44157 -packages and programs it needs; see
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44165 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44172 \begin_layout Subsection
44176 \begin_layout Standard
44181 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44182 \begin_inset space ~
44186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44188 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44195 \begin_layout Section
44197 \begin_inset Index idx
44200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44209 \begin_layout Standard
44210 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44211 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44213 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44217 \begin_layout Standard
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44226 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44227 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44228 packages and classes found
44229 by \SpecialChar LyX
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44237 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44244 \begin_layout Standard
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44253 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44258 \begin_layout Section
44260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44262 name "sec:Toolbars"
44269 \begin_layout Standard
44270 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44271 \begin_inset space ~
44275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44277 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44284 \begin_layout Standard
44285 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44286 This is described in the
44288 Additional Features
44293 \begin_layout Subsection
44295 \begin_inset Index idx
44298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 \begin_layout Standard
44308 \begin_inset Graphics
44309 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44317 \begin_layout Standard
44318 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44324 \begin_layout Standard
44325 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44342 \begin_inset Note Note
44345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44346 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44351 manual for more information.
44359 \begin_layout Standard
44360 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44366 \begin_layout Standard
44367 \begin_inset Tabular
44368 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44369 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44371 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 \begin_inset Graphics
44378 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44392 pull-down box for the environments
44405 \begin_layout Standard
44406 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44412 \begin_layout Standard
44414 \begin_inset Tabular
44415 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44416 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44417 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44418 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44442 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44502 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44518 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44548 arg "spelling-continuously"
44556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44560 Spellcheck continuously
44566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44711 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44716 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44734 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44788 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44831 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44859 Emphasize text, function of the
44860 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44865 \begin_inset space ~
44868 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44876 arg "dialog-show character"
44887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 Set text to noun style, function of the
44909 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44912 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44917 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44919 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44925 arg "dialog-show character"
44936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44942 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44945 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44958 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44979 arg "textstyle-apply"
44989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44994 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44995 Format text using the current settings in the
44997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45002 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45037 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45039 \begin_inset space ~
45048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45057 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45085 arg "tabular-insert"
45093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45112 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45115 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45128 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
45131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45147 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45159 Toggle outline window on/off,
45161 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45177 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 Toggle math toolbar on/off
45195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45216 Toggle table toolbar on/off
45229 \begin_layout Subsection
45231 \begin_inset Index idx
45234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 \begin_layout Standard
45244 \begin_inset Graphics
45245 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45253 \begin_layout Standard
45254 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45260 \begin_layout Standard
45261 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45266 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45272 \begin_layout Standard
45273 \begin_inset Tabular
45274 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
45275 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45276 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45277 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45314 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45368 arg "layout-toggle List"
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45395 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45422 arg "depth-increment"
45430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45438 \begin_inset space ~
45442 \begin_inset space ~
45451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45460 arg "depth-decrement"
45468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45474 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45476 \begin_inset space ~
45480 \begin_inset space ~
45489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45498 arg "float-insert figure"
45506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45513 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45529 arg "float-insert table"
45537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45544 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45590 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45684 arg "nomencl-insert"
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45700 \begin_inset space ~
45709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45718 arg "footnote-insert"
45726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45748 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45764 \begin_inset space ~
45773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45797 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45799 \begin_inset space ~
45808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45817 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45893 \begin_inset space ~
45902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45926 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45957 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 arg "dialog-show character"
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45993 \begin_inset space ~
45996 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46009 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46014 arg "textstyle-apply"
46022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46027 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46028 Format text using the recent settings in the
46031 arg "dialog-show character"
46040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 arg "layout-paragraph"
46057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46065 \begin_inset space ~
46074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46111 \begin_layout Subsection
46112 View/Update Toolbar
46113 \begin_inset Index idx
46116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46117 Toolbar ! View / Update
46125 \begin_layout Standard
46126 \begin_inset Graphics
46127 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46134 \begin_layout Standard
46135 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46141 \begin_layout Standard
46142 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46146 \begin_layout Standard
46147 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46153 \begin_layout Standard
46154 \begin_inset Tabular
46155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46156 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46157 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46158 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 arg "buffer-update"
46206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46228 arg "master-buffer-view"
46236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46244 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
46246 \begin_inset space ~
46252 \begin_inset space ~
46261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46270 arg "master-buffer-update"
46278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46286 \begin_inset space ~
46290 \begin_inset space ~
46299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46308 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46323 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46325 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
46327 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46330 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46331 Synchronize with Output
46337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46365 View (Other Formats)
46371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 arg "update-others"
46382 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46397 Update (Other Formats)
46410 \begin_layout Standard
46412 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46413 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46419 \begin_layout Subsection
46423 \begin_layout Standard
46424 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46425 \begin_inset space ~
46429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46431 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46435 , the table toolbar
46436 \begin_inset Index idx
46439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46453 manual and the math macro toolbar
46454 \begin_inset Index idx
46457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46470 \begin_layout Chapter
46471 The Document Settings
46472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46474 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46479 \begin_inset Index idx
46482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 Document ! Settings
46491 \begin_layout Standard
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46500 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46501 is called with the menu
46503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46507 You can save your document settings as default with the
46509 Save as Document Defaults
46511 button in any dialog.
46512 This will create a template named
46516 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46517 when you create a new document without
46521 \begin_layout Standard
46526 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46527 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46530 \begin_layout Standard
46531 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46532 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46533 to find the one you are looking for.
46534 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46535 the submenus of the dialog.
46537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46541 \begin_inset space \space{}
46545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46552 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46553 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46554 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46557 \begin_layout Section
46561 \begin_layout Standard
46562 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46564 Document classes are described in section
46565 \begin_inset space ~
46569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46571 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46578 \begin_layout Standard
46582 \begin_inset space ~
46587 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46592 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46593 as a layout for a document class.
46594 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46596 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46605 \begin_layout Standard
46606 Some classes use special class options by default.
46607 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46611 and you can decide to use them or not.
46612 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46613 recommended you leave them untouched.
46618 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46619 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46624 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46626 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46632 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46633 \begin_inset Newline newline
46638 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46641 \begin_inset Newline newline
46644 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46645 distribution, see section
46650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46652 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46665 \begin_layout Standard
46670 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46671 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46672 in the background if the child document
46673 is opened without its master.
46674 This way child documents are always compilable.
46675 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46682 \begin_inset space ~
46690 \begin_layout Standard
46691 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46702 \begin_inset Index idx
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46707 packages ! prettyref
46713 \begin_inset Index idx
46716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46718 packages ! refstyle
46723 for cross-references, see section
46724 \begin_inset space ~
46728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46730 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46737 \begin_layout Section
46741 \begin_layout Standard
46742 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46743 Please refer to the section
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46759 manual for details.
46762 \begin_layout Section
46766 \begin_layout Standard
46767 Modules are explained in section
46768 \begin_inset space ~
46772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46774 reference "subsec:Modules"
46781 \begin_layout Section
46785 \begin_layout Standard
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46793 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46800 \begin_layout Section
46804 \begin_layout Standard
46805 The document font settings are described in section
46806 \begin_inset space ~
46810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46812 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46819 \begin_layout Section
46823 \begin_layout Standard
46824 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46836 \begin_inset space ~
46841 and whether it should be a
46844 \begin_inset space ~
46849 can also be specified here.
46852 \begin_layout Standard
46853 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46854 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46855 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46857 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46860 \begin_layout Standard
46863 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46866 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46867 justifies the text on screen.
46868 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46870 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46874 \begin_layout Standard
46876 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46885 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46890 \begin_layout Section
46894 \begin_layout Standard
46895 This dialog is described in sections
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46902 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46909 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46916 \begin_layout Section
46920 \begin_layout Standard
46921 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46922 \begin_inset space ~
46926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46928 reference "subsec:Margins"
46935 \begin_layout Section
46937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46939 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46944 \begin_inset Index idx
46947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46948 Language ! Encoding
46956 \begin_layout Standard
46957 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46958 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46959 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46961 is always encoded in utf8).
46962 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46963 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46964 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46965 -command is not known for
46966 a particular character).
46967 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46971 \begin_layout Standard
46973 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46974 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46975 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46976 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46977 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46978 's default encoding).
46979 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46980 's Unicode support covers the
46981 characters of most scripts.
46982 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46983 using one of the traditional, or
46984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46991 , encodings is necessary.
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46996 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46998 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47001 Traditional (auto-selected)
47007 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47008 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47009 the given language(s).
47011 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47015 \begin_layout Standard
47017 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47018 If you use the option
47023 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47026 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47027 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47030 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47033 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47034 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47035 exactly one encoding.
47036 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47041 \begin_layout Standard
47043 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47044 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47050 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47051 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47055 \begin_layout Standard
47057 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47058 Finally, you can also select
47062 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47063 Note that this encoding is then used for
47068 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47069 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47073 \begin_layout Standard
47075 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47078 Do not load inputenc
47080 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47081 from automatically loading the
47088 \begin_inset Index idx
47091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47093 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47095 packages ! inputenc
47103 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47104 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47105 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47106 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47107 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47109 Note that this option is only available for the standard
47115 Traditional (auto-selected)
47122 \begin_layout Standard
47124 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
47126 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
47127 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
47128 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47129 installation supports Unicode), choose
47130 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47131 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47132 is quite incomplete, so
47133 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
47138 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47139 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47140 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
47141 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47142 -commands is not used, because all
47143 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47144 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47145 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47146 , two new alternative engines
47147 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47149 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47151 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47154 \begin_inset space ~
47162 \begin_inset space ~
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47176 \begin_inset space ~
47180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47182 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47187 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47191 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
47196 \begin_layout Standard
47200 \begin_inset space ~
47205 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47206 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47216 The possible settings are:
47219 \begin_layout Description
47220 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47222 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47223 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47227 \begin_inset space ~
47231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47233 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47240 \begin_layout Description
47241 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47242 format you will use.
47243 In many cases this will be
47248 \begin_inset Index idx
47251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47259 If the newer package
47264 \begin_inset Index idx
47267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47269 packages ! polyglossia
47274 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47275 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47276 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47278 this package will be used instead of
47285 \begin_layout Description
47287 \begin_inset space ~
47298 would be more appropriate.
47301 \begin_layout Description
47302 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47303 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47307 (for German texts), type in
47310 \begin_inset Newline newline
47315 usepackage{ngerman}
47318 \begin_layout Description
47319 None will not use a language package.
47320 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47323 \begin_layout Standard
47324 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47327 \begin_layout Description
47329 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47335 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \begin_inset space ~
47346 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47352 \begin_inset Index idx
47355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47357 packages ! inputenc
47363 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47364 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47365 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47371 \begin_layout Description
47372 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47374 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47375 commands, which may result in a big
47376 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47377 -commands are needed.
47379 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47380 This is the same as the
47393 \begin_layout Description
47395 \begin_inset space ~
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47402 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47405 \begin_layout Description
47407 \begin_inset space ~
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47414 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47417 \begin_layout Description
47419 \begin_inset space ~
47422 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47425 \begin_layout Description
47427 \begin_inset space ~
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47434 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47435 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47438 \begin_layout Description
47440 \begin_inset space ~
47444 \begin_inset space ~
47447 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47451 \begin_layout Description
47453 \begin_inset space ~
47457 \begin_inset space ~
47460 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47461 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47464 \begin_layout Description
47466 \begin_inset space ~
47470 \begin_inset space ~
47474 \begin_inset space ~
47477 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_layout Description
47486 \begin_inset space ~
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47494 \begin_inset space ~
47497 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47498 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47501 \begin_layout Description
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47507 \begin_inset space ~
47510 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47511 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47512 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47513 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47524 \begin_layout Description
47526 \begin_inset space ~
47530 \begin_inset space ~
47533 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47534 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47535 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47537 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47538 \begin_inset space ~
47542 \begin_inset space ~
47548 \begin_layout Description
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47554 \begin_inset space ~
47557 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47560 \begin_layout Description
47562 \begin_inset space ~
47566 \begin_inset space ~
47569 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47572 \begin_layout Description
47574 \begin_inset space ~
47578 \begin_inset space ~
47581 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47584 \begin_layout Description
47586 \begin_inset space ~
47589 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47592 \begin_layout Description
47594 \begin_inset space ~
47597 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47600 \begin_layout Description
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47606 \begin_inset space ~
47609 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47612 \begin_layout Description
47614 \begin_inset space ~
47618 \begin_inset space ~
47624 \begin_layout Description
47626 \begin_inset space ~
47630 \begin_inset space ~
47633 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47636 \begin_layout Description
47638 \begin_inset space ~
47642 \begin_inset space ~
47648 \begin_layout Description
47650 \begin_inset space ~
47654 \begin_inset space ~
47657 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47663 \begin_inset Index idx
47666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47673 , when using this, set the document language to
47678 \begin_layout Description
47680 \begin_inset space ~
47684 \begin_inset space ~
47687 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47692 , when using this, set the document language to
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47701 \begin_layout Description
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47710 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47716 \begin_inset Index idx
47719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47721 packages ! japanese
47726 , when using this, set the document language to
47731 \begin_layout Description
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47740 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47745 , when using this, set the document language to
47750 \begin_layout Description
47752 \begin_inset space ~
47756 \begin_inset space ~
47759 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47764 , when using this, set the document language to
47769 \begin_layout Description
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47774 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47777 \begin_layout Description
47779 \begin_inset space ~
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47787 \begin_inset space ~
47790 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47793 \begin_layout Description
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47799 \begin_inset space ~
47803 \begin_inset space ~
47806 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47807 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47808 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47811 \begin_layout Description
47813 \begin_inset space ~
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47823 \begin_layout Description
47825 \begin_inset space ~
47829 \begin_inset space ~
47832 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47833 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47836 \begin_layout Description
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47842 \begin_inset space ~
47845 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47851 \begin_inset Index idx
47854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47861 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47862 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47864 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47865 with the default encoding (
47867 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47873 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47874 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47879 \begin_layout Description
47881 \begin_inset space ~
47889 \begin_inset space ~
47892 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47899 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47902 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47909 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47910 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47912 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47915 \begin_layout Description
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47921 \begin_inset space ~
47924 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47930 \begin_inset Index idx
47933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47941 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47944 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47946 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47947 This used to be more comprehensive than
47950 \begin_inset space ~
47955 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47960 \begin_layout Description
47962 \begin_inset space ~
47965 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47971 \begin_inset Index idx
47974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47976 packages ! inputenc
47983 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47984 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47986 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47987 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47988 with the default encoding (
47990 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47996 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47997 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48002 \begin_layout Description
48004 \begin_inset space ~
48008 \begin_inset space ~
48012 \begin_inset space ~
48015 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48016 \begin_inset space ~
48022 \begin_layout Description
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48028 \begin_inset space ~
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48035 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48036 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48037 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48041 \begin_layout Description
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48054 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48055 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48058 \begin_layout Section
48060 \begin_inset Index idx
48063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48070 \begin_inset Index idx
48073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48080 \begin_inset Index idx
48083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48084 Color ! Shaded boxes
48090 \begin_inset Index idx
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48094 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48102 \begin_layout Standard
48103 Here you can alter the font color for the
48107 (default: black), for
48110 \begin_inset space ~
48115 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
48119 (default: white) and for
48122 \begin_inset space ~
48132 sets the color back to the default.
48135 \begin_layout Standard
48136 Clicking any button showing
48144 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
48145 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48146 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
48147 later more quickly.
48150 \begin_layout Standard
48151 Note, if you change the
48154 \begin_inset space ~
48159 font color and use the option
48162 \begin_inset space ~
48167 in the document settings under
48170 \begin_inset space ~
48175 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48176 \begin_inset space ~
48180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48182 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48189 \begin_layout Standard
48190 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48196 \begin_layout Standard
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48209 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48212 \begin_inset space ~
48215 Code after a forced page break:
48218 \begin_layout Itemize
48219 For the page color:
48220 \begin_inset Newline newline
48227 pagecolor{color name}
48230 \begin_layout Itemize
48231 For the text color:
48232 \begin_inset Newline newline
48242 \begin_layout Standard
48243 You are restricted to one of
48279 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48286 \begin_inset space ~
48292 \begin_inset Newline newline
48295 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48296 names to refer to them:
48299 \begin_layout Itemize
48305 \begin_inset Newline newline
48310 page_backgroundcolor
48313 \begin_layout Itemize
48317 \begin_inset space ~
48323 \begin_inset Newline newline
48331 \begin_layout Itemize
48335 \begin_inset space ~
48341 \begin_inset Newline newline
48349 \begin_layout Itemize
48353 \begin_inset space ~
48359 \begin_inset Newline newline
48367 \begin_layout Standard
48368 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48371 \begin_inset space ~
48379 \begin_inset space ~
48387 \begin_layout Section
48389 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48393 \begin_layout Standard
48395 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48396 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48397 \begin_inset space ~
48401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48403 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48411 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48412 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48415 \begin_layout Standard
48417 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48418 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48420 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48423 \begin_layout Section
48427 \begin_layout Standard
48428 Here you can adjust the
48432 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48436 as described in section
48437 \begin_inset space ~
48441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48443 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48448 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48452 \begin_layout Standard
48454 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48455 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48457 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
48458 this package can be used as well.
48459 The most common one are:
48462 \begin_layout Description
48464 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48465 right Line numbers to the right margin
48468 \begin_layout Description
48470 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48471 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48475 \begin_layout Description
48477 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48478 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48481 \begin_layout Description
48483 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48484 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48487 \begin_layout Description
48489 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48490 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48493 \begin_layout Description
48495 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48497 \begin_inset space ~
48500 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48505 \begin_layout Section
48509 \begin_layout Standard
48510 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48516 \begin_inset Index idx
48519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48521 packages ! biblatex
48531 \begin_inset Index idx
48534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48546 \begin_inset Index idx
48549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48557 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48560 Sectioned bibliography
48562 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48568 \begin_inset Index idx
48571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48573 packages ! bibtopic
48583 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48584 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48588 for the generation of the bibliography.
48589 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48590 \begin_inset space ~
48594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48596 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48603 \begin_layout Section
48607 \begin_layout Standard
48608 Here you can define the
48612 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48620 reference "sec:Index"
48627 \begin_layout Section
48631 \begin_layout Standard
48632 The PDF properties are explained in section
48633 \begin_inset space ~
48637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48639 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48646 \begin_layout Section
48650 \begin_layout Standard
48651 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48652 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48658 \begin_inset Index idx
48661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48673 \begin_inset Index idx
48676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48688 \begin_inset Index idx
48691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48703 \begin_inset Index idx
48706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48718 \begin_inset Index idx
48721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 packages ! mathdots
48733 \begin_inset Index idx
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 packages ! mathtools
48748 \begin_inset Index idx
48751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48763 \begin_inset Index idx
48766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48768 packages ! stackrel
48778 \begin_inset Index idx
48781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48783 packages ! stmaryrd
48793 \begin_inset Index idx
48796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48798 packages ! undertilde
48803 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48806 \begin_layout Description
48807 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48808 -errors in formulas,
48809 ensure that you have this enabled.
48812 \begin_layout Description
48813 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48814 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48815 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48819 \begin_layout Description
48820 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48823 \begin_inset space ~
48835 \begin_layout Description
48836 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48839 \begin_inset space ~
48851 \begin_layout Description
48852 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48863 \begin_layout Description
48864 mathtools is used for the math commands
48900 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48907 \begin_layout Description
48908 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48910 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48919 \begin_layout Description
48920 stackrel is used for the math command
48937 \begin_layout Description
48938 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48941 \begin_layout Description
48942 undertilde is used for the math command
48950 Accents for one Character
48959 \begin_layout Section
48961 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48963 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48969 \begin_layout Standard
48971 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48972 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48975 \begin_layout Standard
48977 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48978 The float placement options
48979 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48982 are described in the section
48985 \begin_inset space ~
48989 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48991 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48999 \begin_inset space ~
49007 \begin_layout Section
49011 \begin_layout Standard
49012 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49014 Program Code Listings
49019 \begin_inset space ~
49027 \begin_layout Section
49031 \begin_layout Standard
49032 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49040 set to be used and set the
49045 The itemize environment is described in section
49046 \begin_inset space ~
49050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49052 reference "sec:Itemize"
49059 \begin_layout Standard
49060 You can furthermore specify a
49063 \begin_inset space ~
49068 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49069 command of the desired character.
49070 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49077 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49083 \begin_inset space \space{}
49087 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49097 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49098 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49101 \begin_layout Standard
49102 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49110 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49111 -packages in the preamble (menu
49114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49115 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49118 \begin_inset space ~
49124 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49128 usepackage{textcomp}
49131 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49135 usepackage{amssymb}
49145 \begin_layout Section
49149 \begin_layout Standard
49150 Branches are described in section
49151 \begin_inset space ~
49155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49157 reference "sec:Branches"
49164 \begin_layout Section
49166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49168 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49175 \begin_layout Standard
49176 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49179 \begin_layout Description
49181 \begin_inset space ~
49185 \begin_inset space ~
49188 Format: The format that is used when you enter
49189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49208 View Master Document
49209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49216 Update Master Document
49217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49224 menu or the toolbar.
49225 The default is set in
49227 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49228 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49230 \begin_inset space ~
49233 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49237 \begin_inset space ~
49241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49243 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49250 \begin_layout Description
49252 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
49254 \begin_inset space ~
49258 \begin_inset space ~
49262 \begin_inset space ~
49265 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
49270 option which is needed with some packages.
49271 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
49272 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
49275 \begin_layout Description
49277 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
49279 \begin_inset space ~
49283 \begin_inset space ~
49286 Options offers settings for the
49294 \begin_layout Itemize
49298 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
49300 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
49302 \begin_inset space ~
49308 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
49310 \begin_inset space ~
49314 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
49320 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
49322 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
49323 settings for the menu
49325 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49329 \begin_inset space ~
49333 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49336 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49337 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49342 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49344 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49346 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49349 or a detailed description see section
49351 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49356 \begin_inset space ~
49362 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49366 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49370 \begin_layout Itemize
49372 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49375 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49377 determines whether so-called
49378 \begin_inset Quotes els
49382 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49386 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49388 \begin_inset Quotes els
49392 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49395 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49396 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49397 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49399 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49401 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49402 macros, you can uncheck this.
49403 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49410 \begin_layout Description
49412 \begin_inset space ~
49416 \begin_inset space ~
49419 Options offers settings for the export format
49427 \begin_inset space ~
49432 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49433 \begin_inset space ~
49436 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49440 \begin_inset space ~
49445 settings are described in detail in section
49447 Math Output in XHTML
49452 \begin_inset space ~
49461 \begin_inset space ~
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49470 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49473 \begin_layout Description
49475 \begin_inset space ~
49480 Save transient properties
49482 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49483 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49484 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49488 \begin_layout Itemize
49489 the activation of change tracking
49492 \begin_layout Itemize
49493 the output of tracked changes
49496 \begin_layout Itemize
49497 the recording of the document directory path.
49500 \begin_layout Standard
49501 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49502 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49506 \begin_layout Section
49514 \begin_layout Standard
49515 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49517 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49519 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49521 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49525 \begin_layout Standard
49526 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49527 -syntax is given in section
49528 \begin_inset space ~
49532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49534 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49541 \begin_layout Chapter
49547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49549 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49554 \begin_inset Index idx
49557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49566 \begin_layout Standard
49567 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49573 It has the following submenus.
49576 \begin_layout Section
49580 \begin_layout Subsection
49584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49585 User Interface File
49586 \begin_inset Index idx
49589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49590 Customization ! of toolbars
49596 \begin_inset Index idx
49599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49600 Customization ! of menus
49608 \begin_layout Standard
49609 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49610 interface (ui) file.
49611 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49619 \begin_layout Description
49624 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49627 \begin_layout Description
49634 the menu entries in popup context menus
49637 \begin_layout Description
49642 specifies the toolbar buttons
49645 \begin_layout Standard
49646 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49647 and edit the entries.
49650 \begin_layout Standard
49651 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49663 entries must be finished with an explicit
49688 and in the case of the
49689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49701 The syntax for the entries is:
49704 \begin_layout Standard
49705 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49734 \begin_layout Standard
49736 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49739 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49740 -functions are listed in the menu
49742 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49744 \begin_inset space ~
49752 \begin_layout Standard
49753 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49759 \begin_layout Standard
49760 For example, assuming you use the menu
49762 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49765 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49769 \begin_layout Standard
49770 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49794 \begin_layout Standard
49796 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49811 to have the sixth bookmark.
49814 \begin_layout Standard
49818 \begin_inset space ~
49823 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49824 's toolbar buttons.
49825 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49829 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49841 \begin_layout Standard
49844 Enable tool tips in main work area
49846 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49854 \begin_layout Standard
49859 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49860 should display in the menu
49862 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49864 \begin_inset space ~
49872 \begin_layout Subsection
49876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49880 \begin_layout Standard
49883 Restore window layouts and geometries
49886 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49887 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49891 \begin_layout Standard
49894 Restore cursor positions
49896 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49900 \begin_layout Standard
49903 Load opened files from last session
49905 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49909 \begin_layout Standard
49912 Clear all session information
49914 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49915 sessions (cursor positions, names
49916 of last opened documents, etc.).
49919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49923 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49928 \begin_inset Index idx
49931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49940 \begin_layout Standard
49943 Backup original documents when saving
49945 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49946 it was saved the last time.
49947 It is stored in the
49950 \begin_inset space ~
49956 \begin_inset space ~
49960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49962 reference "sec:Paths"
49966 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49969 \begin_inset space ~
49975 The backup file has the file extension
49976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49990 \begin_layout Standard
49993 Backup documents, every
49995 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49998 \begin_layout Standard
50001 Save documents compressed by default
50003 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50004 \begin_inset space ~
50008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50010 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50015 This applies to newly created documents only.
50016 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50020 Windows & work area
50023 \begin_layout Standard
50026 Open documents in tabs
50028 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50032 \begin_layout Standard
50037 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50044 \begin_inset space ~
50048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50050 reference "sec:Paths"
50054 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50061 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50062 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50063 of \SpecialChar LyX
50065 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50066 instance is created for each file.
50069 \begin_layout Standard
50072 Single close-tab button
50074 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50084 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50085 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50086 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50090 \begin_layout Standard
50091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50099 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50100 before the change takes effect.
50108 \begin_layout Standard
50113 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
50115 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50117 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50121 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
50122 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50123 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50126 \begin_layout Subsection
50128 \begin_inset Index idx
50131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50140 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50147 \begin_layout Standard
50148 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50152 \begin_layout Standard
50153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 This section only deals with the fonts
50165 the \SpecialChar LyX
50167 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
50170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50182 \begin_layout Standard
50183 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
50200 (depends on the system) as its
50203 \begin_inset space ~
50219 \begin_layout Standard
50220 You can change the font size with the
50227 \begin_layout Standard
50232 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50237 points have the size of 1
50238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50242 \begin_inset space ~
50246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50248 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50253 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50258 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50259 \begin_inset space ~
50263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50265 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50272 \begin_layout Subsection
50274 \begin_inset Index idx
50277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50278 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
50285 \begin_inset Index idx
50288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50297 \begin_layout Standard
50298 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50299 by choosing an item in the
50300 list and selecting the
50307 \begin_layout Standard
50308 By checking the option
50312 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50315 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50316 \begin_inset space ~
50320 \begin_inset space ~
50325 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50328 \begin_layout Subsection
50330 \begin_inset Index idx
50333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50342 \begin_layout Standard
50343 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50347 \begin_layout Standard
50352 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50353 This feature is described in section
50354 \begin_inset space ~
50358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50360 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50367 \begin_layout Standard
50368 Checking the option
50371 \begin_inset space ~
50375 \begin_inset space ~
50379 \begin_inset space ~
50384 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50387 \begin_layout Section
50389 \begin_inset Index idx
50392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50401 \begin_layout Subsection
50405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50409 \begin_layout Standard
50412 Cursor follows scrollbar
50414 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50418 \begin_layout Standard
50419 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50420 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50421 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50424 \begin_layout Standard
50427 Scroll below end of document
50429 is self-explanatory.
50432 \begin_layout Standard
50433 In \SpecialChar LyX
50434 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50441 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50443 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50444 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50445 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50449 \begin_layout Standard
50451 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
50454 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50456 is only relevant in documents that
50461 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
50470 markup) with this option selected.
50471 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
50473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50477 \begin_inset Quotes els
50481 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50485 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50486 dissolving from insets.
50491 track changes, pasted text is
50496 \begin_inset Quotes els
50500 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50503 notwithstanding the state of this option.
50508 \begin_layout Standard
50511 Sort environments alphabetically
50513 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50516 \begin_layout Standard
50519 Group environments by their category
50521 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50524 \begin_layout Standard
50529 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50538 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50542 \begin_layout Standard
50544 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50547 Search drive for cited files
50549 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50550 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50553 \begin_inset space ~
50557 \begin_inset space ~
50561 \begin_inset space ~
50565 \begin_inset space ~
50568 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50571 context menu on a citation.
50576 field determines the search pattern.
50578 \begin_inset space ~
50582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50584 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50597 \begin_layout Standard
50598 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50603 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50604 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50608 \begin_layout Subsection
50610 \begin_inset Index idx
50613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50620 \begin_inset Index idx
50623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50624 Settings ! Shortcuts
50632 \begin_layout Standard
50637 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50639 Several binding files are available, among them:
50642 \begin_layout Description
50643 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50646 \begin_layout Description
50647 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50659 \begin_layout Description
50660 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50671 \begin_layout Standard
50672 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50677 , and binding files for special languages.
50678 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50683 \begin_inset space \space{}
50687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50695 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50696 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50697 will try to use the appropriate binding
50701 \begin_layout Standard
50702 Some binding files, like
50706 , only have a limited scope.
50707 When looking at the end of the file
50711 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50714 \begin_layout Standard
50718 \begin_inset space ~
50722 \begin_inset space ~
50727 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50728 in the selected key binding file.
50731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50735 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50740 \begin_inset Index idx
50743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50744 Key Bindings ! Editing
50752 \begin_layout Standard
50753 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50754 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50755 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50756 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50759 Show key-bindings containing
50762 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50763 Insert there for example as keyword
50764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50771 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50772 functions that contain
50773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50781 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50782 All \SpecialChar LyX
50783 functions are also listed in the file
50788 that you will find in the
50795 \begin_layout Standard
50796 For example, to add the shortcut
50804 , select the function and press the
50809 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50810 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50813 \begin_layout Standard
50814 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50815 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50820 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50822 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50827 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50830 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50834 \begin_layout Standard
50835 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50838 \begin_layout Standard
50839 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50841 The syntax of the entries is:
50844 \begin_layout Standard
50850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50869 \begin_layout Standard
50870 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50871 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50899 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50900 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50901 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50902 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50904 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50908 , you needed to specify it as
50913 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50916 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50919 \begin_layout Subsection
50921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50923 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50928 \begin_inset Index idx
50931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50938 \begin_inset Index idx
50941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50942 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50950 \begin_layout Standard
50951 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50952 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50953 provides keyboard maps.
50954 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50955 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50958 \begin_inset space ~
50962 \begin_inset space ~
50967 and select the keyboard map file named
50974 \begin_layout Standard
50983 keyboard map and, if you use the
50987 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50990 arg "keymap-primary"
50996 arg "keymap-secondary"
50999 respectively or toggle between them with
51002 arg "keymap-toggle"
51008 \begin_layout Standard
51009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51017 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51026 \begin_layout Standard
51027 You can also specify the mouse
51029 Wheel scrolling speed
51032 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51036 Middle mouse button pasting
51038 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51039 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51042 \begin_layout Standard
51050 \begin_inset space ~
51054 \begin_inset space ~
51059 you can select a key for zooming.
51060 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51063 \begin_layout Subsection
51067 \begin_layout Standard
51068 Input completion is described in section
51069 \begin_inset space ~
51073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51075 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51082 \begin_layout Section
51084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51091 \begin_inset Index idx
51094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51101 \begin_inset Index idx
51104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51113 \begin_layout Standard
51114 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51115 are normally determined during
51117 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51120 \begin_layout Description
51122 \begin_inset space ~
51125 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51126 's working directory.
51127 It is the default when you
51138 \begin_inset space ~
51146 \begin_layout Description
51148 \begin_inset space ~
51151 templates This directory
51152 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
51153 contains the templates that are shown
51154 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
51155 will be opened when you use the menu
51156 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
51161 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51163 \begin_inset space ~
51167 \begin_inset space ~
51175 \begin_layout Description
51177 \begin_inset space ~
51180 files This directory
51181 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
51182 will be opened when you use the
51183 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
51184 contains the example files that are listed in
51187 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
51196 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51198 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
51200 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
51206 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
51208 \begin_inset Newline newline
51212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51224 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51225 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51235 \begin_layout Description
51237 \begin_inset space ~
51241 \begin_inset Index idx
51244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51250 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51251 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51252 \begin_inset space ~
51256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51258 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51266 will be used to save the backups.
51267 \begin_inset Newline newline
51270 Backup files have the ending
51271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51281 \begin_layout Description
51283 \begin_inset space ~
51286 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51287 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51289 \begin_inset Newline newline
51296 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51302 You can edit this file with the program
51311 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51312 in its preferences under
51315 \begin_inset space ~
51321 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51326 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51328 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51329 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51335 and \SpecialChar LyX
51336 need to be running the same time.
51337 \begin_inset Newline newline
51340 The pipe is also used for the
51344 feature, see section
51345 \begin_inset space ~
51349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51351 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51356 \begin_inset Newline newline
51359 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51360 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51361 \begin_inset Newline newline
51377 \begin_layout Description
51379 \begin_inset space ~
51382 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51385 \begin_layout Description
51387 \begin_inset space ~
51390 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51391 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51392 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51395 \begin_layout Description
51397 \begin_inset space ~
51400 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51406 You only need to specify it if you are using
51410 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51412 For \SpecialChar LyX
51417 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51421 \begin_layout Description
51423 \begin_inset space ~
51426 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51427 When \SpecialChar LyX
51428 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51429 to find it on the system.
51430 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51432 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51441 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51442 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51445 \begin_layout Description
51447 \begin_inset space ~
51450 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51451 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51452 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51453 code or in the document
51455 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51457 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51458 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51459 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51460 scanned for the input files.
51461 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51462 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51464 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51465 compilation may fail for some documents.
51468 \begin_layout Section
51472 \begin_layout Standard
51473 Here you can insert your
51482 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51484 \begin_inset space ~
51488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51490 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51494 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51497 \begin_layout Section
51499 \begin_inset Index idx
51502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51503 Language ! Settings
51509 \begin_inset Index idx
51512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51513 Settings ! Language
51521 \begin_layout Subsection
51523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51525 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51532 \begin_layout Description
51534 \begin_inset space ~
51538 \begin_inset space ~
51541 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51543 You can find its actual translation status here:
51544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51546 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51552 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51558 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51559 LaTeX Language Support
51564 \begin_layout Description
51566 \begin_inset space ~
51569 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51570 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51571 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51572 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51589 The most widespread language package is
51594 \begin_inset Index idx
51597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51604 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51606 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51607 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51608 come with the alternative
51614 \begin_inset Index idx
51617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51619 packages ! polyglossia
51624 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51625 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51631 The available selections are described in section
51632 \begin_inset space ~
51636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51638 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51645 \begin_layout Description
51647 \begin_inset space ~
51651 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51652 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51653 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51655 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51659 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51663 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51665 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51669 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51670 that is used to switch to a different language
51671 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51672 to start the package
51676 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51677 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51681 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51682 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51685 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51689 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51697 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51705 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51708 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51710 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51714 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51732 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51733 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51740 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51741 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51746 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51751 , this setting is ignored.
51756 \begin_layout Description
51758 \begin_inset space ~
51762 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51769 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51770 Use this if the language switch set in
51774 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51778 's alternative command
51782 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51783 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51786 end{otherlanguage*}
51790 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51791 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51792 command toggles the package on and off
51793 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51794 Empty by default, as
51798 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51800 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51805 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51811 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51816 , this setting is ignored.
51821 \begin_layout Description
51823 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51825 \begin_inset space ~
51829 \begin_inset space ~
51832 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51836 \begin_layout Description
51838 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51840 \begin_inset space ~
51844 \begin_inset space ~
51847 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51853 \begin_layout Description
51855 \begin_inset space ~
51859 \begin_inset space ~
51863 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51865 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51868 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51869 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51872 to the document class options
51873 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51874 rather than the language package options.
51875 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51879 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51880 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51882 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51883 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51885 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51890 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51891 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51900 \begin_layout Description
51902 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51904 \begin_inset space ~
51908 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51910 \begin_inset space ~
51914 \begin_inset space ~
51918 \begin_inset space ~
51924 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51926 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51929 this option is set,
51930 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51931 the language switch defined in
51934 \begin_inset space ~
51939 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51940 to the document language.
51941 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51942 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51945 \begin_inset space ~
51950 or if a package resets the document language.
51951 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51952 usually should be the document language).
51953 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51954 documents start with the chosen document language.
51955 When this option is not set, the
51958 \begin_inset space ~
51963 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51965 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51968 \begin_inset space ~
51978 \begin_layout Description
51980 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51982 \begin_inset space ~
51986 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51988 \begin_inset space ~
51992 \begin_inset space ~
51996 \begin_inset space ~
52002 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52006 \begin_inset space ~
52010 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52011 Set document language explicitly
52017 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52019 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52025 \begin_inset space ~
52031 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52033 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52037 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52039 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52042 the end of the document.
52043 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52048 \paragraph_spacing single
52050 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52056 \begin_layout Description
52058 \begin_inset space ~
52062 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52064 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52068 \begin_inset space ~
52072 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52074 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52076 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52080 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52083 in a language different
52084 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52086 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52089 the document language will be
52090 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52091 marked (by default with a blue
52094 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
52096 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
52100 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
52104 \begin_layout Description
52106 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
52108 \begin_inset space ~
52112 \begin_inset space ~
52116 \begin_inset space ~
52119 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
52120 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
52121 switched via the operating system.
52122 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
52124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52127 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
52128 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
52133 \begin_layout Description
52135 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
52137 \begin_inset space ~
52141 \begin_inset space ~
52144 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
52145 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
52150 \begin_layout Description
52152 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52154 \begin_inset space ~
52158 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
52160 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52164 \begin_inset space ~
52168 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
52169 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
52170 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
52172 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
52176 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
52178 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
52179 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
52181 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52182 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
52183 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
52185 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
52190 \begin_layout Standard
52195 means that the cursor
52196 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
52197 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
52198 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
52200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52203 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
52204 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
52208 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
52210 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
52211 specific case always means: move
52215 in text (even if this means:
52221 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52222 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
52223 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
52224 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
52225 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
52226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52237 \begin_layout Standard
52239 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
52244 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
52245 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
52246 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
52250 ) when coming from the left.
52251 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
52253 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52254 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52255 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
52260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52262 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
52266 \begin_layout Description
52268 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
52270 \begin_inset space ~
52274 \begin_inset space ~
52277 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
52278 separator alignment).
52279 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
52281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52284 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
52285 (static) custom character here.
52288 \begin_layout Description
52290 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
52292 \begin_inset space ~
52296 \begin_inset space ~
52299 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52305 \begin_layout Subsection
52309 \begin_layout Standard
52310 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
52311 \begin_inset space ~
52315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52317 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52324 \begin_layout Section
52328 \begin_layout Subsection
52330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52332 name "subsec:General-output"
52339 \begin_layout Description
52341 \begin_inset space ~
52344 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52346 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52348 \begin_inset space ~
52354 For a detailed description see section
52356 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52361 \begin_inset space ~
52369 \begin_layout Description
52371 \begin_inset space ~
52374 Options Options for the program
52378 that is used for the export format
52383 \begin_inset space ~
52387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52389 reference "subsec:Export"
52394 Possible options are listed in the
52399 \begin_inset Newline newline
52403 \begin_inset Flex URL
52406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52408 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52418 \begin_layout Description
52420 \begin_inset space ~
52424 \begin_inset space ~
52427 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52430 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52431 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52433 \begin_inset space ~
52439 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52442 \begin_layout Description
52444 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52446 \begin_inset space ~
52450 \begin_inset Index idx
52453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52460 \begin_inset Index idx
52463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52464 Settings ! Date format
52469 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52470 \begin_inset Newline newline
52474 \begin_inset Flex URL
52477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52479 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52485 \begin_inset Newline newline
52488 For example the format
52489 \begin_inset Newline newline
52493 \begin_inset Newline newline
52496 prints the date as day/month/year.
52501 \begin_layout Description
52503 \begin_inset space ~
52507 \begin_inset space ~
52510 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52511 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52514 \begin_layout Subsection
52520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52522 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52527 \begin_inset Index idx
52530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52531 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52540 \begin_layout Description
52542 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52544 \begin_inset space ~
52552 \begin_inset space ~
52556 \begin_inset space ~
52559 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52564 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52585 are used for Cyrillic.
52586 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52599 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52601 sets up in the background.
52602 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52607 \begin_layout Description
52609 \begin_inset space ~
52613 \begin_inset space ~
52617 \begin_inset space ~
52621 \begin_inset space ~
52624 options They only have an effect when the program
52628 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52631 \begin_layout Standard
52632 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52633 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52634 manuals of the applications.
52637 \begin_layout Description
52639 \begin_inset space ~
52642 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52643 \begin_inset space ~
52647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52649 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52656 \begin_layout Description
52658 \begin_inset space ~
52661 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52662 \begin_inset space ~
52666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52668 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52675 \begin_layout Description
52677 \begin_inset space ~
52680 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52681 \begin_inset space ~
52685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52687 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52694 \begin_layout Description
52700 \begin_inset space ~
52703 command Command for the program
52705 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52708 that is described in the section
52710 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52715 Additional Features
52720 \begin_layout Standard
52721 There are additionally the following options:
52724 \begin_layout Description
52726 \begin_inset space ~
52730 \begin_inset space ~
52734 \begin_inset space ~
52738 \begin_inset space ~
52743 \begin_inset space ~
52746 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52764 to separate folders.
52765 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52767 \begin_inset Index idx
52770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52777 \begin_inset Index idx
52780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52789 \begin_layout Description
52791 \begin_inset space ~
52795 \begin_inset space ~
52799 \begin_inset space ~
52803 \begin_inset space ~
52807 \begin_inset space ~
52811 \begin_inset space ~
52814 changes Removes all manually set
52820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52821 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52823 \begin_inset space ~
52828 dialog when changing the document class.
52831 \begin_layout Section
52833 \begin_inset space ~
52837 \begin_inset Index idx
52840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52849 \begin_layout Subsection
52851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52853 name "subsec:Converters"
52858 \begin_inset Index idx
52861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52870 \begin_layout Standard
52871 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52872 from one format to another.
52873 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52874 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52881 \begin_inset space ~
52886 field and press the
52891 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52895 \begin_inset space ~
52900 drop-down list, modify the
52904 field and press the
52911 \begin_layout Standard
52914 Converter File Cache
52920 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52922 Maximum Age (in days
52925 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52926 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52929 \begin_layout Standard
52930 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52931 definition, is described in the section
52942 \begin_layout Subsection
52944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52946 name "sec:File-Formats"
52951 \begin_inset Index idx
52954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52961 \begin_inset Index idx
52964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52973 \begin_layout Standard
52974 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52984 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52987 \begin_layout Standard
52988 You can also define the
52990 Default output format
52992 that is used when you use
52994 View, Update, View Master Document
52998 Update Master Document
53004 menu or the toolbar.
53007 \begin_layout Standard
53008 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53019 \begin_layout Standard
53020 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53022 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53023 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53024 This is done by specifying a
53029 More about this is described in the section
53040 \begin_layout Chapter
53041 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53043 \begin_inset Index idx
53046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53055 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53062 \begin_layout Standard
53064 \begin_inset space ~
53068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53070 reference "tab:Units"
53074 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53075 and used in this documentation.
53078 \begin_layout Standard
53079 \begin_inset Float table
53086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53087 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53105 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53113 \begin_inset Tabular
53114 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
53115 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
53116 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53117 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
53118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53271 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
53275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53542 scaled point (65536
53543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53610 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53734 % of original image width
53739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53823 \begin_layout Standard
53824 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53827 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53834 \begin_layout Bibliography
53835 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53836 LatexCommand bibitem
53843 The \SpecialChar LyX
53845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53848 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53854 \begin_inset Newline newline
53858 \begin_inset Flex URL
53861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53863 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53871 \begin_layout Bibliography
53872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53873 LatexCommand bibitem
53874 key "latexcompanion"
53879 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53881 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53882 Companion Second Edition.
53885 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53888 \begin_layout Bibliography
53889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53890 LatexCommand bibitem
53896 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53899 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53903 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53906 \begin_layout Bibliography
53907 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53908 LatexCommand bibitem
53917 : A Document Preparation System.
53920 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53923 \begin_layout Bibliography
53924 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53925 LatexCommand bibitem
53935 The \SpecialChar TeX
53939 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53942 \begin_layout Bibliography
53943 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53944 LatexCommand bibitem
53950 The \SpecialChar TeX
53952 \begin_inset Newline newline
53956 \begin_inset Flex URL
53959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53961 https://ctan.org/topic
53969 \begin_layout Bibliography
53970 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53971 LatexCommand bibitem
53977 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53979 \begin_inset Newline newline
53983 \begin_inset Flex URL
53986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53988 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53996 \begin_layout Bibliography
53997 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53998 LatexCommand bibitem
54005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54007 name "Documentation"
54008 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54015 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54019 \begin_inset Newline newline
54023 \begin_inset Flex URL
54026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54028 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54036 \begin_layout Bibliography
54037 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54038 LatexCommand bibitem
54045 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54047 name "Documentation"
54048 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54053 how to use the program
54055 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54059 \begin_inset Newline newline
54063 \begin_inset Flex URL
54066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54068 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54076 \begin_layout Bibliography
54077 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54078 LatexCommand bibitem
54085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54087 name "Documentation"
54088 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54093 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54099 \begin_inset Index idx
54102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54104 packages ! biblatex
54110 \begin_inset Newline newline
54114 \begin_inset Flex URL
54117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54119 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
54127 \begin_layout Bibliography
54128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54129 LatexCommand bibitem
54136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54138 name "Documentation"
54139 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
54144 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54150 \begin_inset Index idx
54153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54161 \begin_inset Newline newline
54165 \begin_inset Flex URL
54168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54170 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
54178 \begin_layout Bibliography
54179 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54180 LatexCommand bibitem
54187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54189 name "Documentation"
54190 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
54200 \begin_inset Newline newline
54204 \begin_inset Flex URL
54207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54209 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54217 \begin_layout Bibliography
54218 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54219 LatexCommand bibitem
54220 key "makeindex-man"
54226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54229 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54239 \begin_inset Newline newline
54243 \begin_inset Flex URL
54246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54248 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54256 \begin_layout Bibliography
54257 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54258 LatexCommand bibitem
54265 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54267 name "Documentation"
54268 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54278 \begin_inset Newline newline
54282 \begin_inset Flex URL
54285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54287 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54295 \begin_layout Bibliography
54296 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54297 LatexCommand bibitem
54304 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54306 name "Documentation"
54307 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54312 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54314 \begin_inset Newline newline
54318 \begin_inset Flex URL
54321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54323 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54331 \begin_layout Bibliography
54332 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54333 LatexCommand bibitem
54340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54342 name "Documentation"
54343 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54348 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54354 \begin_inset Index idx
54357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54365 \begin_inset Newline newline
54369 \begin_inset Flex URL
54372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54374 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54382 \begin_layout Bibliography
54383 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54384 LatexCommand bibitem
54391 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54393 name "Documentation"
54394 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54399 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54405 \begin_inset Index idx
54408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54410 packages ! enumitem
54416 \begin_inset Newline newline
54420 \begin_inset Flex URL
54423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54425 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54433 \begin_layout Bibliography
54434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54435 LatexCommand bibitem
54442 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54444 name "Documentation"
54445 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54450 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54456 \begin_inset Index idx
54459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54461 packages ! fancyhdr
54467 \begin_inset Newline newline
54471 \begin_inset Flex URL
54474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54476 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54484 \begin_layout Bibliography
54485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54486 LatexCommand bibitem
54493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54495 name "Documentation"
54496 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54501 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54507 \begin_inset Index idx
54510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54512 packages ! hyperref
54518 \begin_inset Newline newline
54522 \begin_inset Flex URL
54525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54527 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54535 \begin_layout Bibliography
54536 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54537 LatexCommand bibitem
54544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54546 name "Documentation"
54547 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54552 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54558 \begin_inset Index idx
54561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54563 packages ! microtype
54569 \begin_inset Newline newline
54573 \begin_inset Flex URL
54576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54578 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54586 \begin_layout Bibliography
54587 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54588 LatexCommand bibitem
54595 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54597 name "Documentation"
54598 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54603 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54609 \begin_inset Index idx
54612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54620 \begin_inset Newline newline
54624 \begin_inset Flex URL
54627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54629 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54637 \begin_layout Bibliography
54638 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54639 LatexCommand bibitem
54646 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54648 name "Documentation"
54649 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54654 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54660 \begin_inset Index idx
54663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54665 packages ! prettyref
54671 \begin_inset Newline newline
54675 \begin_inset Flex URL
54678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54680 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54688 \begin_layout Bibliography
54689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54690 LatexCommand bibitem
54697 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54699 name "Documentation"
54700 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54705 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54711 \begin_inset Index idx
54714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54716 packages ! refstyle
54722 \begin_inset Newline newline
54726 \begin_inset Flex URL
54729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54731 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54739 \begin_layout Bibliography
54740 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54741 LatexCommand bibitem
54748 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54751 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54756 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54758 \begin_inset Newline newline
54762 \begin_inset Flex URL
54765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54767 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54775 \begin_layout Bibliography
54776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54777 LatexCommand bibitem
54784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54787 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54792 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54794 \begin_inset Newline newline
54798 \begin_inset Flex URL
54801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54803 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54811 \begin_layout Bibliography
54812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54813 LatexCommand bibitem
54820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54823 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54828 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54829 for Cyrillic languages:
54830 \begin_inset Newline newline
54834 \begin_inset Flex URL
54837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54839 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54847 \begin_layout Bibliography
54848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54849 LatexCommand bibitem
54856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54859 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54864 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54866 \begin_inset Newline newline
54870 \begin_inset Flex URL
54873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54875 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54883 \begin_layout Bibliography
54884 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54885 LatexCommand bibitem
54892 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54895 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54900 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54902 \begin_inset Newline newline
54906 \begin_inset Flex URL
54909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54911 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54919 \begin_layout Bibliography
54920 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54921 LatexCommand bibitem
54928 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54931 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54936 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54938 \begin_inset Newline newline
54942 \begin_inset Flex URL
54945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54947 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54955 \begin_layout Standard
54956 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54990 \begin_inset Note Note
54993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55000 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55001 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55002 bibliography is the second one:
55010 \begin_layout Standard
55011 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55012 LatexCommand bibtex
55013 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55014 options "biblio/alphadin"
55021 \begin_layout Standard
55022 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55026 \begin_layout Standard
55030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55036 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55045 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55053 \begin_inset Note Note
55056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55057 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55058 \begin_inset space ~
55062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55064 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55076 \begin_layout Standard
55077 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55078 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55084 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55085 LatexCommand printindex